DUCATO LUM GB
17-12-2008
9:57
Pagina 1
F
I
A
T
D
U
C
A
T
ENGLISH
The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and
versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.
If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.
Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.
O
W
N
E
R
H
A
N
D
B
O
O
K
O
WHY CHOOSING
GENUINE PARTS
We really know your vehicle because we invented,
designed and built it: we really know every single detail. At Fiat Professional Service authorised workshops
you can find technicians directly trained by us, offering quality and professionalism for all service operations.
Fiat Professional workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations,
season checks and practical recommendations by our experts.
With Fiat Professional Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance
features of your new vehicle unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for.
Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our vehicles; we recommend them because they come from
our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.
For all these reasons:
rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed by Fiat Professional for your vehicle.
SAFETY:
BRAKING SYSTEM
ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS,
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
COMFORT:
SUSPENSION AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS
PERFORMANCE:
SPARK PLUGS, INJECTORS
AND BATTERIES
LINEACCESSORI:
ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS
CHOOSING GENUINE PARTS
IS THE MOST NATURAL CHOICE
PERFORMANCE
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
COMFORT
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
SAFETY
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
AMBIENT
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
ACCESSORIES
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
VALUES
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
HOW TO RECOGNISE
GENUINE PARTS
All Genuine Parts undergo strict controls, both during design and manufacturing stages,
by specialists using vanguard materials,
to test the component reliability.
This to guarantee performance and safety for you and your passengers on board,
for a long time.
Always ask for and make sure a Genuine Part has been used.
Dear customer,
Thank you for choosing Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Ducato.
We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible
way.
You are recommended to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time. You will find information, tips
and important warnings regarding the use of your vehicle to help you get the most from the technical features of your
Fiat Ducato.
Read the warnings and indications, marked with the following symbols:
personal safety;
vehicle integrity;
environmental protection.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers:
❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity;
❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers.
Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!
This Owner Handbook describes all the versions of the Fiat Ducato. As a
consequence, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim
level, engine and version that you have purchased.
VERY IMPORTANT
REFUELLING
Only refuel with automotive diesel conforming to
the European specification EN590. The use of
other products or mixtures may damage the
engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate
the warranty, due to the damage caused.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the
gear lever to neutral; fully depress the clutch
without pressing the accelerator, then turn the
ignition key to MAR-ON and wait for the
warning lights
and
to switch off; turn
the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as
the engine has started.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
The catalytic converter develops high
temperatures during operation. Do not park on
grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other
flammable material: fire hazard.
RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The vehicle is fitted with a system that allows
continuous diagnosis of the emission-related
components in order to help protect the
environment.
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add
electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually
draining the battery), visit a Fiat Dealership. They
can calculate the overall electrical requirement
and check that the vehicle's electrical system can
support the required load.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance enables the vehicle to
perfectly maintain performance and safety
characteristics, its environmental friendliness and
low running costs over time.
THE OWNER MANUAL CONTAINS…
... important information, advice and warnings for
correct use, driving safety and maintenance of
your vehicle over time. Special attention must be
paid to the symbols (safety of persons)
(environmental protection) (vehicle
integrity).
KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The presence and position of the controls, instruments and indicators may vary according to the different
versions.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 1
F0N0510M
1. Fixed side air vents – 2. Adjustable side air vents – 3. Left stalk: external light control – 4. Instrument panel and warning
lights – 5. Right stalk: windscreen wiper, rear window wiper, trip computer controls – 6. Adjustable centre air vents – 7. Car
radio (for versions/markets, where provided) – 8. Passenger side glove compartment/front air bag (for versions/markets, where
provided) – 9. Glove compartment – 10. Cigar lighter/12 V socket – 11. Heating/ventilation/climate control system controls –
12. Controls in the dashboard – 13. Gear lever – 14. Ignition device – 15. Steering wheel adjustment lever – 16. Driver's front
air bag/Horn – 17. Control plate: lamp/headlamp alignment adjustment/digital display/multifunction display.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
3
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
SYMBOLS
THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM
Special coloured labels have been attached near or
on some of the components of your vehicle. These
labels bear symbols that draw your attention to
the precautions required when handling the
component in question.
A plate summarising these symbols can be found
under the bonnet fig. 2.
This is an electrical engine immobiliser system which
increases protection against attempted theft of the
vehicle. It is automatically activated when the ignition
key is removed.
Each key contains an electronic device which
modulates the signal emitted during ignition by an
antenna built into the ignition device. The modulated
signal, which changes each time the engine is started,
is the “password”, by means of which the control
unit recognises the key and enables to start the
engine.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
OPERATION
Each time the vehicle is started turning the ignition
key to MAR-ON, the Fiat CODE system control
unit sends a recognition code to the engine control
unit to deactivate the inhibitor.
The recognition code is sent only if the Fiat CODE
system control unit has recognised the code
transmitted from the key.
Each time the ignition key is turned to STOP, the Fiat
CODE system deactivates the functions of the
engine management control unit.
If the code has not been recognised correctly, the
warning light
turns on accompanied by the
related message on the display (see section “Warning
lights and messages”).
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
4
fig. 2
F0N0002
In this case, turn the key to STOP and then to
MAR-ON; if it is still locked, try again with
the other keys that come with the vehicle. Contact a
Fiat Dealership if you still cannot start the engine.
IMPORTANT Each key has its own code which must
be stored by the system's electronic control unit.
Contact the Fiat Dealership to have new keys (up to
eight) stored with the code.
Warning light
switching on while driving
❒ If the
warning light switches on, this means
that the system is running a self-diagnosis (for
example for a voltage drop).
❒ If the warning light
stays on, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
THE KEYS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
CODE CARD
The vehicle is delivered with two copies of the
ignition key and with the CODE card fig. 3, which
bears the following:
A the electronic code;
B the mechanical key code to be given to the Fiat
Dealership when ordering duplicate keys.
IMPORTANT In order to ensure complete efficiency
of the electronic devices inside the keys, they should
never be exposed to direct sunlight.
All the keys and the CODE card must be
handed over to the new owner when
selling the vehicle.
The electronic components inside the key
may be damaged if the key is subjected
to strong shocks.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 3
F0N0003
5
KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
WARNING
The metal insert A fig. 4 fig. 5 is retractable in the
grip and it operates:
❒ the ignition switch;
❒ the door locks;
❒ opening and closing of the fuel tank cap.
To extract the metal insert, press button B fig. 4
fig. 5.
To refit it in the grip proceed as follows:
❒ hold down button B and turn the metal insert A;
❒ release button B and turn the metal insert A
completely until the locking click is heard to
ensure correct closure.
Button B should only be pressed when
the key is away from the body, in
particular from the eyes and from objects that
can be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Do not leave the key
unattended to avoid the button being
accidentally pressed while it is being handled,
e.g. by a child.
Button
is used for unlocking the front doors.
Button is used for locking all the doors.
Button
is used for unlocking the load
compartment doors.
When unlocking the doors, the internal lights will
come on for a preset time.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
6
fig. 4
F0N0800
fig. 5
F0N0801
For some versions there is a key with remote control
and 2 buttons and fig. 5.
Button locks all the doors.
Button unlocks all the doors.
Should a new remote control be necessary, contact a
Fiat Dealership and be ready to present the CODE
card, a personal identity document and the vehicle
ownership documents.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Dashboard LED indications
Changing battery - key with remote control
fig. 7
SAFETY
When locking the doors, the LED A fig. 6 switches
on for about 3 seconds and then starts flashing
(deterrence function).
When the doors are locked, if one or more doors
are not closed correctly, the LED and direction
indicators start flashing quickly.
Request for additional remote controls
The system can recognise up to 8 keys with
incorporated remote control.
To replace the remote control battery, proceed as
follows:
❒ press button A and open the metal insert B;
❒ turn the screw C to using a fine bit screwdriver;
❒ take out the battery case D and replace the
battery E making sure that polarities are correct;
❒ refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it
turning the screw C to .
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 6
F0N0114
fig. 7
F0N0802
7
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Used batteries are harmful to the
environment.You can dispose of them
either in the correct containers as
specified by law or by taking them to a Fiat
Dealership, which will deal with their disposal.
KEY WITHOUT REMOTE CONTROL
The metal insert A fig. 8 of the key is fixed.
The key operates:
❒ the ignition switch;
❒ the door locks;
❒ opening and closing of the fuel tank cap.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
8
fig. 8
F0N0337
The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:
Type of key
Unlocking
the doors
Locking the
doors from
the outside
Mechanical
key/key with
remote
control
Turn key
anticlockwise
(driver's side)
Turn key
clockwise
(driver's side)
Key with
remote
control
Direction
indicators
flashing (only
with key with
remote
control)
Deterrent LED
Briefly press
/
Briefly press
Unlocking of
Dead Lock
load
activation (*) compartment
lock
Lowering
windows (*)
Raising
windows (*)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
-
Press
twice
2 flashes
1 flash
3 flashes
Switching off
Switching on
constantly for
about 3
seconds,
followed by
deterrence
LED flashing
Double flash,
followed by
deterrence
flashing
-
Briefly press
2 flashes
-
-
Hold down
Hold down
(for more than
2 seconds)
(for more than
2 seconds)
2 flashes
1 flash
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Deterrence
LED flashing
Switching off
Deterrence
LED flashing
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(*)For versions/markets, where provided.
IMPORTANT Window opening operation is a consequence of a door unlocking control; window closing
operation is a consequence of a door locking control.
INDEX
9
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
ELECTRONIC ALARM
TURNING THE ALARM ON
(for versions/markets, where provided)
With the doors and bonnet closed and the ignition
key either turned to STOP or removed, point the
key with the remote control towards the vehicle and
press and release the lock button.
Excluding some markets, the system produces an
acoustic signal (beep) and enables door locking.
The switching on of the alarm is preceded by an
self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is detected, the system
produces another acoustic signal.
In this case, turn the alarm off by pressing the
"release doors/release load compartment" button,
check that the doors and bonnet are properly closed
and turn the alarm back on by pressing the lock
button.
If a door or the bonnet is not properly shut, it will
be excluded from the check by the alarm system.
If the alarm produces an acoustic signal even when
the doors and bonnet are correctly closed, a fault
has occurred in the operation of the system. Contact
a Fiat Dealership.
The alarm, in addition to all the remote control
functions described previously, is controlled by the
receiver located under the dashboard near the
fuse box.
ALARM INTERVENTION
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
10
The alarm intervenes in the following cases:
❒ wrongful opening of a door or the bonnet
(perimeter protection);
❒ when the ignition system is started up (ignition key
rotated to MAR-ON);
❒ cutting of the battery leads.
Depending on the market, the activation of the alarm
causes the activation of the siren and the direction
indicators (for about 26 seconds). Alarm tripping and
the number of cycles depend on the sales market.
There is a maximum number of acoustic/visual cycles.
When this is reached the system returns to normal
operation.
IMPORTANT The engine stop function is guaranteed
by the Fiat CODE, which is automatically activated
when the ignition key is extracted from the ignition
switch.
IMPORTANT The alarm does not come on when the
central locking is activated using the metal insert in
the key.
IMPORTANT The alarm is adapted to meet
requirements in various countries.
TURNING THE ALARM OFF
Press the “door release/load compartment release”
button on the key with remote control.
The following operations are performed (excluding
some markets):
❒ the direction indicators flash briefly twice;
❒ there are two short acoustic signals (beeps);
❒ unlocking of the doors.
IMPORTANT The alarm does not switch off when
the central opening is activated using the metal insert
in the key.
BREAK IN ATTEMPT INDICATION
Any break in attempt is indicated by the turning on
of warning light Y on the instrument panel together
with the message on the multifunction display (where
provided), (see section “Warning lights and
messages”).
IGNITION DEVICE
The key can be turned to 3 different positionsfig. 9:
❒ STOP: engine off, key extractable, steering locked.
Some electrical devices (e.g. sound system, central
door locking system, etc.) can operate;
❒ MAR-ON: driving position. All electrical devices
are enabled;
❒ AVV: engine starting (unstable position).
The ignition switch is fitted with an electronic safety
system that requires the ignition key to be turned
back to STOP if the engine will not start, before the
starting operation can be repeated.
WARNING
If the ignition device is tampered with
(e.g. attempted theft), have it checked
over by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
DISABLING THE ALARM
To permanently disable the alarm (e.g. during a
lengthy period of idleness), simply lock the vehicle by
turning the metal insert of the key with remote
control in the lock.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT If the batteries of the key with the
remote control run out or the system fails, the alarm
can be switched off by placing the key in the ignition
switch and turning it to MAR-ON.
INDEX
fig. 9
F0N0007
11
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
12
WARNING
Always remove the key when you leave
your vehicle to prevent someone from
accidentally operating the controls. Remember
to engage the handbrake. Engage first gear if
the vehicle is parked uphill or reverse gear if the
vehicle is parked downhill. Never leave children
unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
Never extract the key while the vehicle
is moving.The steering wheel will lock as
soon as it is turned.This also applies to cases in
which the vehicle is towed.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out
whatever after-market operation
involving steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft
device) that could badly affect performance and
safety, cause the lapse of warranty and also
result in non-compliance of the car with type
approval requirements.
STEERING LOCK
Engagement
When at STOP, remove the key and turn the steering
wheel until it locks.
Disengagement
Move the steering wheel slightly as you turn the
ignition key to MAR-ON.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
fig. 10
F0N0518
A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Engine coolant temperature gauge with
overheating warning light E. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
13
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
ON BOARD INSTRUMENTS
The instrument background colour and type may
vary according to the version.
SPEEDOMETER (speed indicator)
This shows the speed of the vehiclefig. 11.
When the engine is idling, the rev counter may
indicate a gradual or sudden increase of the engine
speed.
This is normal and does not indicate a fault. It may be
caused, for example, by the operation of the climate
control system or the fan. In these cases, a slow
change in revs is used to protect the battery charge.
REV COUNTER
The rev counter fig. 12 shows the number of engine
revolutions per minute.
IMPORTANT The electronic injection control system
gradually shuts off the flow of fuel when the engine
is over-revving, resulting in a gradual loss of engine
power.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
14
fig. 11
F0N0332
fig. 12
F0N0013
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
This shows the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
E - tank empty.
F - tank full (see the description in paragraph "Vehicle
refuelling" in this chapter).
The warning light A fig. 13 switching on indicates that
there are about 10-12 litres of fuel (for versions
with tank capacity 90-120 l) or 10 l (for versions with
tank capacity 60 l) remaining in the tank.
Do not travel with the tank nearly empty to prevent
damaging the catalytic converter.
The needle shows the temperature of the engine
coolant and starts supplying indications when the
fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C. In normal
use, the needle could assume different positions
within the scale, depending on the usage conditions.
C - Low engine coolant temperature.
H - High engine coolant temperature.
The warning light B fig. 14 may switch on (with a
message on the display for some versions) to indicate
that the coolant temperature is too high; in this
case, stop the engine and contact a Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT The needle will point to E and warning
light A will flash to indicate a fault in the system. If
this is the case, go to a Fiat Dealership to have
the system checked.
IMPORTANT It is not advisable to activate the
additional Webasto heater in reserve conditions.
If the needle for the engine coolant
temperature reaches the red area, stop
the engine immediately and contact a Fiat
Dealership.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 13
F0N0014
fig. 14
F0N0015
15
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
ENGINE OIL LEVEL GAUGE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The gauge fig. 15 provides a graphic indication of the
level of oil in the engine.
When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the
top line of the display shows the oil level by lighting
up / switching off five symbols.
The gradual switching off of the symbols indicates a
decreasing oil level.
Four or five symbols light up to indicate a sufficient
level of oil in the sump. If the fifth symbol is not
lit, this does not indicate a fault or that insufficient
oil is present in the sump.
If the oil level is lower than the minimum required
value, the display shows a dedicated message
indicating minimum engine oil level and the need for
a top-up.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
16
fig. 15
F0N1021
IMPORTANT To find out the correct oil quantity,
always check using the dipstick (see paragraph
“Checking levels” in the section “Maintenance and
care”).
After a few seconds, the symbol display indicating the
amount of engine oil disappears and:
❒ When the next scheduled servicing intervention is
approaching, the time to the next service is
displayed and the warning light õ lights up on the
display. When the service date is reached, the
display shows a dedicated message;
❒ Later on, if the time for changing the engine oil is
getting close, the distance until the next oil change
will appear on the display. When the service
interval has expired, a dedicated warning will be
shown on the display.
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The multifunction display is able to display
information that is useful and necessary during when
driving.
"STANDARD" SCREEN
The standard screen can display the following
information fig. 16:
A Date
B Milometer (distance covered in km or miles).
C Time.
D Outside temperature
E Headlamp alignment position (only with dipped
headlamps on).
Note When one of the front doors is opened, the
display is activated, showing the time and mileage for
a few seconds.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
CONTROL BUTTONS
To scroll up through the screen and the related
options or to increase the displayed value.
SAFETY
MODE
Press briefly to access the menu and/or go to next
screen or confirm the desired menu selection.
Hold down to go back to the standard screen.
To scroll down through the screen and the
related options or to decrease the displayed
value.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 16
F0N0519
fig. 17
F0N0017
17
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
18
Note The and buttons activate different
functions according to the following situations:
Adjusting the vehicle interior lighting
- with the side lights on and standard screen active, it
is possible to adjust the brightness inside the vehicle.
Setup menu
- scrolling up or down within the menu;
- increasing or decreasing during setting operations.
SETUP MENU
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 18
F0N1020
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
19
Setup menu functions
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
20
The menu fig. 18 comprises a series of functions
arranged in a cycle which can be selected through
the and buttons to access the different selection
operations and settings (setup) given in the following
paragraphs. A submenu is provided for some items
(Setting the clock and Set units).
The setup menu can be activated by pressing the
MODE button briefly.
Single presses of the or buttons permit
navigation through the setup menu options.
Operating modes differ here according to the
characteristics of the option selected.
Selecting an option from the main menu without
submenu:
- by briefly pressing the MODE button you can select
the main menu setting that you wish to modify;
- by pressing the or buttons (with single
presses) you can choose the new setting;
- by briefly pressing the MODE button you can store
the setting and then return to the same main menu
option that was first selected.
Selecting an option from the main menu with submenu:
- briefly press the MODE button to display the
first submenu option;
- press the or buttons (with a single press) to
scroll through all submenu options;
- briefly press the MODE button to select the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant
settings menu;
- press the or buttons (with a single press) to
choose the new setting for this submenu option;
- briefly press the MODE button to store the setting
and return to the previously selected submenu
option.
Selecting “Date” and “Set Clock”:
- briefly press the MODE button to select the first
value to be changed (e.g. hours / minutes or year
/ month / day);
- press the or buttons (with a single press) to
select the new setting;
- briefly press the MODE button to store the new
setting and go to the next settings menu option.
If this is the last one, the system brings you back to
the previously selected menu option.
Hold down the MODE button:
- to exit the set-up menu if you are in the main
menu;
– to exit to the main menu if you are in another
point of the menu (e.g. at submenu option setting
level, at submenu level or at main menu option
setting level);
- to save only the changes stored by the user (and
confirmed by pressing the MODE button).
The setup menu environment is timed; when the
menu is exited due to expiry of the time allowed,
only the changes already stored by the user
(confirmed beforehand by a brief press of the MODE
button) will be saved.
From the standard screen, briefly press button
MODE to start navigation.
Press the or buttons to navigate within the
menu.
Note Only the reduced menu can be accessed while
the vehicle is moving for safety reasons ("Speed
Beep" setting). Stop the vehicle to access the full
menu.
Speed limit (Speed Beep)
This function can be used to set a vehicle speed limit
(km/h or mph). The driver is alerted when this
limit is exceeded (see "Warning lights and
messages").
To set the desired speed limit, proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button: the display will
show the wording (Speed Beep);
- press the or button to select speed limit
activation (On) or deactivation (Off );
- if the function has been activated (On), press the
or buttons to select the desired speed limit and
then press MODE to confirm.
Note Setting is possible between 30 and 200 km/h,
or 20 and 125 mph, according to the previously
set unit. See the "Setting the unit of measurement
(Measurement unit)" paragraph described below. The
setting will increase/decrease by 5 units each time
button / is pressed. Hold down the / button
to automatically increase/decrease the setting rapidly.
Complete the adjustment with single presses of the
button when you approach the desired value.
- press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
- press the MODE button briefly to make the display
flash (On);
- press the button: (Off) will flash on the display;
- briefly press the MODE button to go back to
the menu screen or hold the button down to go
back to the standard screen without saving.
Headlight sensor sensitivity adjustment
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This function allows you to adjust the headlight
sensor sensitivity to 3 levels.
To set the desired sensitivity level, proceed as
follows:
– briefly press the MODE button: the previously set
sensitivity “level” starts to flash on the display;
– press the or button to adjust;
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
21
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
Trip B activation (TripB data)
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
22
This function can be used to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B display (partial trip).
For further information see the "Trip computer"
paragraph.
To activate / deactivate, proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button: ON or OFF flashes
on the display (depending the previous setting);
- press the or button to select;
- press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
Setting the clock (Set time)
This function allows you to set the clock through
two submenus: “Time” and “Format”.
To adjust, proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button and two submenus,
"Time" and "Format", will be displayed;
- press the or button to switch between the
two submenus;
- once you have selected the submenu to be changed,
press the button MODE briefly;
- if you enter the "Time" submenu, pressing the
MODE button briefly makes the "hours" flash on the
display;
- press the or button to adjust;
- briefly press the MODE button: the "minutes"
starts to flash on the display;
- press the or button to adjust;
– if you enter the "Format" submenu, pressing the
MODE button briefly makes the display format flash
on the display;
- press the or button to select "24h" or "12h"
mode.
When you have made the adjustment, briefly press
the MODE button to go back to the submenu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the main
menu screen without storing.
- hold down the MODE button again to return to
the standard screen or to the main menu according
to where you are in the menu.
Setting the date (Set date)
Using this function it is possible to update the date
(day - month - year).
To update, proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button: the day starts
flashing on the display (dd);
- press the or button to adjust;
- briefly press the MODE button: the month starts
flashing on the display (mm);
- press the or button to adjust;
- briefly press the MODE button: the year starts
flashing on the display (yyyy);
- press the or button to adjust.
Note The setting will increase or decrease by one
unit each time the or button is pressed. Holding
the button down causes an automatic rapid
increase/decrease. Complete the adjustment with
single presses of the button when you approach the
desired value.
- press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
Audio information display (See radio)
With this function, the display shows information
about the radio.
- Radio: selected station frequency or RDS message,
automatic tuning activation or AutoSTore;
- Audio CD, MP3 CD: track number;
- CD Changer: CD number and track number;
To show the sound system information in the display
(On) or clear it (Off), proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button: ON or OFF flashes
on the display (depending the previous setting);
- press the or button to select;
- press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
Automatic central locking with vehicle moving
(Autoclose)
After activation (On), this function allows the
automatic locking of the doors when the speed
exceeds 20 km/h.
To activate (On) or deactivate (Off) this function,
proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button to display a
submenu;
- briefly press the MODE button: ON or OFF flashes
on the display (depending the previous setting);
- press the or button to select;
- press the MODE button briefly to return to the
submenu screen or hold the button down to return
to the main menu screen without storing;
- hold down the MODE button again to return to
the standard screen or to the main menu according
to where you are in the menu.
Setting the unit of measurement
(Measurement unit)
With this function it is possible to set the unit of
measurement using three submenus: "Distance",
"Consumption" and "Temperature".
To set the unit of measurement, proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button to display the
three submenus;
- press the or button to navigate through the
three submenus;
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
23
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
24
- once you have selected the submenu to be changed,
press the button MODE briefly;
- if you enter the "Distances" submenu, pressing the
MODE button briefly makes the display show "km"
or "mi" (depending on the previous setting);
- press the or button to select;
- if you enter the "Consumption" submenu, pressing
the MODE button briefly makes "km/l", "l/100km"
or "mpg" appear on the display (depending on the
previous setting);
If the set distance unit is "km", the display enables
setting of the fuel consumption unit (km/l or l/100
km).
If the set distance unit is "mi", the display shows the
amount of fuel consumed in "mpg".
- press the or button to select;
- if you enter the "Temperature" submenu, pressing
the MODE button makes "°C" or "°F" appear on the
display (depending on the previous setting);
- press the or button to select;
When you have made the adjustment, briefly press
the MODE button to go back to the submenu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the main
menu screen without storing.
- hold down the MODE button again to return to
the standard screen or to the main menu according
to where you are in the menu.
Language selection (language)
Display messages can be shown in different
languages: Italian, German, English, Spanish, French,
Portuguese and Dutch.
To set the desired language, proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button: the previously set
"language" starts flashing on the display;
- press the or button to select;
- press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
Adjusting the alert/warning acoustic signal
volume (Warning volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer which
accompanies the display of failure/warning can be
adjusted according to 8 levels.
To set the desired volume, proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button: the previously set
volume "level" will flash on the display;
- press the or button to adjust;
- press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
Adjusting button volume (Button Vol.)
This function allows the volume of the acoustic signal
that accompanies MODE, and button presses
to 8 levels.
To set the desired volume, proceed as follows:
- briefly press the MODE button: the previously set
volume "level" will flash on the display;
- press the or button to adjust;
- press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
SBR buzzer reactivation (Belt Buzzer)
This function can be displayed only after a Fiat
Dealership has deactivated the SBR system (see "SBR
system" in the "Safety" section).
Service
Scheduled servicing
Using this function you can display information about
the mileage intervals for car servicing.
To consult this information, proceed as follows:
– briefly press the MODE button: the display shows
when servicing is due in km or mi according to
the previous setting (see paragraph “Units of
measurement”);
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen.
Oil change
This function displays information regarding the
remaining mileage before the next oil change.
To consult this information, proceed as follows:
– briefly press the MODE button; the display shows
the estimated mileage before the next oil change
(depending on the driving mode);
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the button down to return to
the standard screen.
Note The "Scheduled Servicing Plan" requires the
vehicle to be serviced every 30,000 km (or 18,000
mi). This indication will appear automatically, with
the key at MAR-ON, starting from 2,000 km (or
1,240 mi) and will be displayed every 200 km (or 124
mi). Oil change notification messages are displayed
in the same way. Use the and buttons to
alternate between displaying scheduled servicing and
engine oil change information. Below 200 km
servicing indications are more frequent. The display
will be in km or mi depending on the measurement
unit settings. When the next scheduled service is
approaching, the word “Service” will appear on the
display, followed by the number of kilometres or
miles left, when the key is turned to MAR-ON.
Contact a Fiat Dealership, where the operations in
the ""Scheduled servicing plan" will be performed and
the message will be reset.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
25
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
26
Note When an oil change is nearly due and the
ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the display will
show a dedicated message. Engine performance will
decrease if driving is continued in these conditions.
When the change is due, the dedicated message
will reappear on the display together with the
activation of both the
and
warning lights.
Contact a Fiat Dealership.
Activating/deactivating front passenger side
air bags and side bags for chest protection
(Passenger air bag)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This function is used to activate/deactivate the front
passenger side air bag.
Proceed as follows fig. 19:
❒ press the MODE button and, after the message
"Bag pass: Off" (to deactivate) or "Bag pass: On"
(to activate) is displayed by pressing the and
buttons, press the MODE button again;
❒ the confirmation request message will appear on
the display;
❒ by pressing the or buttons, select (Yes) (to
confirm activation/deactivation) or (No) (to
cancel);
❒ press the MODE button briefly and a message
confirming the selection will be displayed, then you
will return to the menu screen, or hold the
button down to return to the standard screen
with storing.
fig. 19
F0N1030
Exit menu
The last function, which closes the cycle of settings
listed in the menu screen.
Pressing the MODE button briefly will return the
display to the standard screen without storing.
Press the button to return to the first menu
option (Speed Beep).
TRIP COMPUTER
General information
The Trip computer is used to display information on
vehicle operation when the ignition key is turned
to MAR-ON. This function allows you to define two
separate trips, called "Trip A" and "Trip B", for
monitoring the "complete mission" (journey) of the
vehicle in a reciprocally independent manner. Both
functions can be reset (reset means start of a new
journey).
“Trip A” is used to display the figures relating to:
❒ Outside temperature
❒ Range
❒ Distance covered
❒ Average consumption
❒ Instantaneous consumption
❒ Average speed
❒ Trip time (driving time).
"Trip B", available on multifunction display only, is
used to display the values relating to:
❒ Distance travelled B
❒ Average consumption B
❒ Average speed B
❒ Trip time B (driving time).
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
27
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
The “Trip B” function may be disabled
(see “Activating Trip B”).“Range” and
“Instant consumption" parameters cannot
be reset.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
28
Shows the approximate average fuel consumption
since the start of the new journey.
Values displayed
Instantaneous consumption (for versions/markets, where
provided)
External temperature
This value shows the fuel consumption. The value is
constantly updated. The display will show “- - - -”
if the car is parked with the engine running.
Indicates the temperature outside the vehicle
passenger compartment.
Range (for versions/markets where provided)
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Average consumption (for versions/markets, where
provided)
This value shows the distance that the car can still
cover before needing fuel, assuming that driving style
is unvaried. “- - - -” will appear on the display in
the following cases:
❒ range value lower than 50 km (or 30 mi)
❒ vehicle is left parked with the engine running for a
long time.
IMPORTANT The range can be affected by several
factors: driving style (see “Driving style” in the
“Starting and driving” section), type of route
(motorway, towns and cities, mountain roads, etc…),
conditions of use (load, tyre pressures, etc…). Trip
planning must therefore take the above into account.
Distance covered
Shows the distance covered since the start of the
new journey.
Average speed
This shows the average car speed as a function of the
overall time elapsed since the start of the new
mission.
Trip time
Shows the time elapsed since the start of a new
journey.
IMPORTANT If there is no information, the Trip
computer displays "----" in place of the value. When
normal operating conditions are restored, the
counting of the various values is resumed, without
either zeroing the values displayed prior to the
problem, or starting a new mission.
TRIP control button
The TRIP button, located on the top of the right
stalk fig. 20, is used (with ignition key at MAR-ON)
to display these values and reset them to start a new
mission:
❒ brief press to access the various parameter
displays;
❒ long press to reset and then start a new mission.
New mission
This begins after a reset:
❒ “manual” resetting by the user, by pressing the
relevant button;
❒ “automatic” resetting, when the distance travelled
reaches 3,999.9 km or 9,999.9 km (depending on
the type of display) or when the travel time
reaches 99.59 (99 hours and 59 minutes);
❒ after disconnection/reconnection of the battery.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
IMPORTANT The reset operation when “Trip A”
details are being displayed only resets the
information associated with this function.
SAFETY
IMPORTANT The reset operation when “Trip B”
details are being displayed resets only the
information associated with this function.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Start of journey procedure
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
With ignition key at MAR-ON, press and hold the
TRIP button for more than 2 seconds to reset.
Exit Trip
You can automatically exit the TRIP function once all
the values have been displayed or by holding the
MODE button down for more than 1 second.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 20
F0N0019
29
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SEATS
Height adjustment
WARNING
All adjustments must be made with the
vehicle stationary.
The fabric upholstery of your vehicle is
designed to withstand the normal wear
and tear of your vehicle for a long time.
You are however recommended to avoid strong
and/or continuous scratching with clothing
accessories such as metal buckles, studs,Velcro
fastenings and the like, as these items cause stress
of the cover fabric that could lead threads to
break and damage the upholstery.
Lengthwise adjustment
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
30
To raise the seat: whilst sitting, move lever B
fig. 21 upwards (front part of the seat) or lever C
fig. 21 (rear part of the seat) and shift your body
weight away from the part of the seat to be raised.
To lower the seat: whilst sitting, move the lever
B (front part of the seat) or the lever C (rear part of
the seat) upwards and position your body weight
on the part of the seat to be lowered.
Backrest angle adjustment
Turn knob D fig. 21.
WARNING
For maximum safety, keep the back of
your seat upright, lean back into it
and make sure the seat belt fits closely across
your chest and pelvis.
Lift the lever A fig. 21 and push the seat forwards or
backwards: in driving position your arms should
rest on the rim of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Once you have released the adjustment
lever, always check that the seat is
locked on the guides by trying to move it back
and forth. If it is not locked, the seat may move
unexpectedly and make you lose control of
the vehicle.
fig. 21
F0N0118
Lumbar adjustment
Damper weight adjustment
To adjust, operate knob E fig. 22.
Use adjustment knob A fig. 23 to set the required
setting based on body weight, with settings between
40 kg and 130 kg.
SPRUNG SEAT
The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring system
and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure maximum
comfort and safety. The system of springs also
effectively absorbs impact from uneven road surfaces.
See the description in the "Seats" section for the
lengthwise adjustments, height adjustments, backrest
adjustment, lumbar adjustment and armrest
adjustment.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 22
F0N0147
fig. 23
F0N0139
31
SEATS WITH ADJUSTABLE ARMRESTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
The driver's seat may be equipped with an armrest
that can be raised and is height adjustable. To adjust,
use wheel A fig. 24.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
WARNING
SEAT WITH REVOLVING BASE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
It may be turned through 180° toward the seat on
the opposite side. Use the control A fig. 25 to rotate
the seat. Before turning, move the seat forward and
only then carry out the lengthwise adjustment fig. 26.
Before putting on the front seat belts,
make sure that the armrests are in
vertical position (see "Seat belts" paragraph).
WARNING
Before unfastening the belts and getting
out of the vehicle, ensure that the outer
armrest (door side) is fully raised.
IN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 25
F0N0187
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
32
1
fig. 24
F0N0148
fig. 26
2
F0N0700
REVOLVING SEAT WITH SEAT BELT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Backrest angle adjustment
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Operate lever A fig. 28.
It is equipped with a seat belt with three anchoring
points fig. 27, two adjustable armrests (for the
adjustment, see "Seats with adjustable armrests"
paragraph) and height-adjustable head restraints (for
the adjustment, see "Head restraints" paragraph).
Height adjustment
Operate controls B fig. 28 or C fig. 28 respectively to
raise/lower the front/rear part of the seat.
WARNING
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
All adjustments must be made with the
vehicle stationary. In particular, while
turning the seat, take care that it does not
interfere with the handbrake lever.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 27
F0N0173
fig. 28
F0N0174
33
Seat rotation
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
It may be turned through 180° toward the seat on
the opposite side and approximately 35° toward the
door It may be locked in driving position or at 180°.
Use the lever D fig. 29 (on the right side of the
seat) to turn the seat.
Before turning, move the seat forward and only then
carry out the lengthwise adjustment fig. 26.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
WARNING
Ensure that the seat is locked in driving
position before starting the vehicle.
Heated seats
(for versions/markets where provided)
With the key turned to MAR-ON, press button E
fig. 30 to switch the function on/off.
FLAP ON BENCH
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The seat is equipped with a fold-down flap that can
be used as a document support surface. To use,
the pull tab A fig. 31 and lower the flap. The flap is
equipped with two cup holders and a support surface
with a paper holder clip.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
34
fig. 29
F0N0175
fig. 30
F0N0213
WARNING
Do not place heavy loads on the flap
with the vehicle in motion because they
could be thrown against the vehicle occupants
in the event of sudden braking or impacts,
causing severe injury.
This gives access to the tray under the seat (see
"Tray under seat" paragraph).
To make it easier to open the front cover and gain
access to the compartment, the seat must be as
far back as possible.
SAFETY
TRAY UNDER SEAT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
STARTING AND
DRIVING
A tray A fig. 32 is present under the seat that can be
easily removed by withdrawing the hooks on the
support base.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
SEAT BASE PLASTIC COVERS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The front cover A fig. 33 can be opened by operating
the release handle B fig. 33 on the upper part.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
fig. 32
F0N0237
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 31
F0N0149
fig. 33
F0N0238
35
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
To allow removal of the front cover, it must be
turned as far forward as possible and withdrawn
from the hooks on the lower side by pulling toward
the front of the vehicle.
On the one-piece Panorama seat in the second row
both side seats are fixed.
PANORAMA VERSIONS
Lift lever C fig. 34 and fold the backrest forwards.
A hard surface on the back of the middle seat is for
use as an armrest and table with cup holders.
Operate the same lever to reposition the backrest.
To fold the backrest of the middle seat in the second
row, remove the head restraint to make it easier to
adjust the backrest of the middle seat in the first
row.
Adjustment of passenger seat tilting backrest
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
Turn the knob A fig. 34.
Access to second row seats
To gain access to the second row of seats, operate
the lever B fig. 34 for the right outer side seat in the
first row and fold the backrest forward, pushing
with your left hand.
When the seat is restored to its normal position, it
engages with the retaining device without the need
to operate the lever again.
Folding middle seat backrest (2nd - 3rd row)
COMBI VERSIONS
Easy Entry Position
Raise lever A fig. 35 and tilt the backrest forwards.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
36
fig. 34
F0N0227
fig. 35
F0N0228
Stacked position
WARNING
Proceed as follows:
– remove the head restraints from the easy entry
position;
– raise lever B fig. 36 (located under lever A fig. 35)
with your right hand;
– turn the backrest 5° towards the rear;
– fold the backrest forward with your left hand.
Do not travel with passengers seated in
the 3rd row with the 2nd row bench
folded over. Do not place objects of any type on
the backrest of the 2nd bench with the row
folded over: in the event of impact or sharp
braking they could be thrown against the
occupants of the vehicle casing serious injury.
For more information, see the contents of the
adhesive plate located under the bench.
Removing the bench
IMPORTANT At least two people are needed to
remove the bench.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 36
F0N0229
fig. 37
F0N0230
37
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Proceed as follows to remove the bench:
from stacked position, operate levers C and D
fig. 37, turning them forward (as specified on the
adhesive plate located on the lower crossmember);
– lift the seat base forward;
– bring the seat to an upright position;
– from the upright position, operate levers E and F
fig. 38 rotating them upwards;
– raise the bench from the floor and remove it.
WARNING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
When refitting the bench, ensure that it
is correctly locked to the floor guides.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
FRONT
On certain versions the head restraints are
adjustable in height and they lock automatically in the
required position fig. 39.
Adjustment
❒ Upwards adjustment: lift the head restraint until it
locks.
❒ Downwards adjustment: press the button A fig. 39
and lower the head restraint.
To extract the front head restraints press buttons A
and B fig. 39 at the side of the two supports
simultaneously and release them upwards.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
38
fig. 38
F0N0231
fig. 39
F0N0020
WARNING
All adjustments must be carried out only
with the vehicle stationary and the
engine off. Head restraints must be adjusted so
that the head, rather than the neck, rests on
them. Only when they are adjusted in this
manner can they serve their intended purpose.
To take best advantage of the protection
provided by the head restraint, adjust the seat
back so that you are sitting up straight and your
head is as close to the head restraint as
possible.
STEERING WHEEL
The steering wheel position can be adjusted axially.
To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows:
❒ release the lever fig. 40 by pulling it towards the
steering wheel (position 2);
❒ adjust the steering wheel;
❒ block the lever by pushing it forwards (position 1).
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
All adjustments must be carried out only
with the vehicle stationary and the
engine off.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 40
F0N0321
39
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out
whatever after-market operation
involving steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft
device) that could badly affect performance and
safety, cause the lapse of warranty and also
result in non-compliance of the car with type
approval requirements.
REAR VIEW MIRRORS
INTERIOR MIRROR
The mirror is fitted with a safety device that causes
its release in the event of a violent impact with
the passenger.
Lever A fig. 41 can be used to move the mirror to
two different positions: normal or antiglare.
DOOR MIRRORS
Mirrors with manual adjustment
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
To adjust the mirrors, manually operate on each of
the two glasses of each mirror.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
40
fig. 41
F0N0022
WARNING
As the driver's exterior mirror is curved,
it may slightly alter the perception of
distance of the reflected image. Further, the
reflective surface of the lower part of the
exterior mirrors is parabolic to increase the
field of view.The reflected image size is thus
reduced and gives the impression that the
reflected item is further away than it actually
is.
After rotating knob B on the mirror to be adjusted,
move it in the direction shown by the arrows to
adjust the selected glass.
Mirror folding with manual adjustment fig. 43
When required (for example when the mirror causes
difficulty in narrow spaces or during an automatic
car wash) it is possible to fold the mirrors manually,
moving them from position 1 to position 2.
If the mirror has been accidentally rotated forwards
(position 3), for example due to an impact, it must
be manually returned to position 1.
Mirrors with electrical adjustment
Electrical adjustment can only be carried out with
the ignition key in the MAR-ON position.
To adjust the mirrors, turn the knob B fig. 42 to one
of the four positions: 1 left mirror, 2 right mirror, 3
left wide angle, 4 right wide angle.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
WARNING
When driving the mirrors should always
remain in position 1.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 42
F0N0024
fig. 43
F0N0023
41
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
Mirror folding with electrical adjustment
fig. 43 - fig. 44
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When required (for example when the mirror causes
difficulty in narrow spaces or during an automatic
car wash) it is possible to fold the mirrors both
electrically and manually, moving them from position
1 fig. 43 to position 2.
Electrical folding
To fold the mirrors electrically, press point 2 of
rocker button A fig. 44. To bring the mirrors back to
open position, press point 1 of the button.
IMPORTANT If the mirrors are folded electrically,
they should be returned to the open position
electrically: do not try to return the mirrors
manually to driving position.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
42
fig. 44
F0N0159
Manual folding
To fold the mirrors manually, move them from
position 1 fig. 43 to position 2. If the mirrors are
folded manually, they can be returned to the open
position both manually and electrically.
IMPORTANT To bring the mirrors electrically to
open position, press point 2 of the rocker button A
fig. 44 until an engagement “click” is heard, then
press point 1 of the button again.
Folding forwards
The mirrors can be manually folded forwards
(position 3 fig. 43) or brought to open position 2
again manually if they have been accidentally rotated
forwards (for example due to an impact).
If the mirrors have been rotated forwards manually
or due to an impact, they can be returned to open
position both manually and electrically.
To bring the mirrors electrically to open position,
press point 2 of the rocker button A fig. 44 until an
engagement “click” is heard, then press point 1 of
the button again.
IMPORTANT If the mirrors have been manually
folded to position 3 fig. 43 by mistake, the mirror
moves to an intermediate position. In this case,
manually rotate the mirror to position 1, then press
point 2 of the rocker button A fig. 44 to return
the mirror to position 2 until a “click” is heard, then
press point 1 of the button to bring it back to
position 1.
Defrosting/demisting
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The mirrors are fitted with resistances that operate
when the heated rear window is activated (by
pressing the
button).
IMPORTANT This function is timed and will turn off
automatically after several minutes.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
43
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
HEATING AND VENTILATION
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 45
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
44
F0N0322
1. Upper fixed diffuser - 2. Adjustable centre diffusers - 3. Fixed side diffusers - 4. Adjustable side diffusers - 5. Lower
diffusers for front seats.
DIFFUSERS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
ADJUSTABLE SIDE AND CENTRAL
DIFFUSERS
A Fixed diffusers for side windows.
B Adjustable side diffusers.
C Fixed diffusers.
D Adjustable centre diffusers.
E Air flow adjustment control.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
The diffusers A and C cannot be adjusted.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 46
F0N0026
fig. 47
F0N0027
45
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
HEATING AND VENTILATION
CONTROLS
CONTROLS fig. 48
Air temperature adjustment ring nut A
(mixing hot and cold air)
Red section = hot air
Blue section = cold air
to warm the feet and convey slightly cooler air
to the dashboard vents, in intermediate
temperature conditions;
for heating when the outside temperature is
very low: to direct as much air as possible to the
feet;
to warm the feet and demist the windscreen at
the same time;
for quick windscreen demisting.
Fan activation/adjustment knob B
Air recirculation on/off knob D
0 = fan off
1-2-3 = fan speed
4
= maximum fan speed
When knob D is turned to
recirculation is activated.
When knob D is turned to
recirculation is deactivated.
Air distribution ring nut C
to convey air to the central and side vents;
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
VENTILATION
the internal air
the internal air
To ventilate the passenger compartment well,
proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the blue section;
❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on
;
❒ turn ring nut C to ;
❒ turn knob B to required speed.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING
INDEX
46
fig. 48
F0N0514
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ turn the ring nut C to the required position;
❒ turn knob B to required speed.
FAST PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
HEATING
For the fast heating of the passenger compartment,
proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ start internal air recirculation by placing knob D
on
;
❒ turn ring nut C to ;
❒ turn knob B to 4
(max. fan speed).
Then use the controls to maintain the required
comfort conditions and turn the knob D to
to
turn the air recirculation off and to prevent misting.
IMPORTANT With a cold engine, you have to wait
for a few minutes to let the system fluid reach
optimum operating temperature.
IMPORTANT To guarantee rapid demisting/
defrosting, if an additional heater is present (under
the front or rear seat on Panorama and Combi
versions), if activated, deactivate it using the button F
(LED off ) located in the control panel fig. 49.
After demisting/defrosting, operate the controls to
restore the required comfort conditions.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Window demisting
In the event of considerable external moisture
and/or rain and/or large differences in temperature
inside and outside the passenger compartment,
perform the following preventive window demisting
procedure:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on
;
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
FRONT WINDOW FAST DEMISTING/
DEFROSTING (WINDSCREEN AND SIDE
WINDOWS)
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on
;
❒ turn ring nut C to
;
❒ turn knob B to 4
(max. fan speed).
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 49
F0N0500
47
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
❒ turn ring nut C to
and consider moving to
misting does not occur;
❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed.
SAFETY
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING OF HEATED
REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRRORS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
if
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Press button A fig. 50 to activate this function; once
enabled, the light on the button comes on. This
function is timed and will turn off automatically after
20 minutes. Press button A again to switch the
function off.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on the inside of
the rear window over the heating filaments to avoid
damage.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
48
fig. 50
F0N0043
INTERNAL AIR RECIRCULATION
ACTIVATION
Turn knob D fig. 48 to
.
It is advisable to switch the internal air recirculation
on while standing in queues or in tunnels to prevent
the introduction of polluted air. Do not use the
function for a long time, particularly if there are
many passengers on board, to prevent the windows
from misting up.
IMPORTANT Internal air recirculation makes it
possible to reach the required heating or cooling
conditions more quickly depending on the mode
selected.
Do not use the air recirculation function on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the
possibility of the windows misting.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
(for versions/markets, where provided)
CONTROLS fig. 51
Air temperature adjustment ring nut A
(mixing hot and cold air)
Red section = hot air
Blue section = cold air
to warm the feet and convey slightly cooler air
to the dashboard vents, in intermediate
temperature conditions;
for heating when the outside temperature is
very low: to direct as much air as possible to the
feet;
to warm the feet and demist the windscreen at
the same time;
for quick windscreen demisting.
Air recirculation on/off knob D
Fan activation/adjustment knob B
Press the button (button LED on) to turn the
internal air recirculation on.
Press the button again (button LED off ) to turn the
internal air recirculation off.
0 = fan off
1-2-3 = fan speed
4
= maximum fan speed
Air distribution ring nut C
to convey air to the central and side vents;
Climate control system on/off button E
Press the button (button LED on) to turn the
climate control system on.
Press the button again (button LED off ) to turn the
climate control system off.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
VENTILATION
To ventilate the passenger compartment well,
proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the blue section;
❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on
;
fig. 51
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
F0N0515
49
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
50
❒ turn ring nut C to ;
❒ turn knob B to required speed.
❒ turn the ring nut C to the required position;
❒ turn knob B to required speed.
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (cooling)
FAST PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
HEATING
For fast cooling of the passenger compartment,
proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the blue section;
❒ start internal air recirculation by placing knob D
on
;
❒ turn ring nut C to ;
❒ press button E to turn the climate control system
on; the LED on the button will come on;
❒ turn knob B to 4
(maximum fan speed).
Cooling adjustment
❒ turn the ring nut A to the right to increase the
temperature;
❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on
;
❒ turn knob B to reduce fan speed.
IMPORTANT When the air conditioner compressor
button E is pressed, the function is only activated if
at least the first fan speed is selected (knob B).
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
For the fast heating of the passenger compartment,
proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ start internal air recirculation by placing knob D
on
;
❒ turn ring nut C to ;
❒ turn knob B to 4
(max. fan speed).
Then use the controls to maintain the required
comfort conditions and turn the knob D to
to
turn the air recirculation off and to prevent misting.
IMPORTANT With a cold engine, you have to wait
for a few minutes to let the system fluid reach
optimum operating temperature.
FRONT WINDOW FAST DEMISTING/
DEFROSTING (WINDSCREEN AND SIDE
WINDOWS)
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ turn knob B to 4
(max. fan speed).
;
❒ turn ring nut C to
❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on
;
IMPORTANT To guarantee rapid demisting/
defrosting, if an additional heater/air conditioner is
present (under the front or rear seat on Panorama
and Combi versions), if activated, deactivate it using
the button F fig. 52 (LED off) located in the control
panel.
After demisting/defrosting, operate the controls to
restore the required comfort conditions.
IMPORTANT The climate control system is very
useful for speeding up demisting since it dehumidifies
the air. Adjust the controls as described above and
press button E to switch the climate control system
on; the LED on the button will light up.
Window demisting
In the event of considerable external moisture
and/or rain and/or large differences in temperature
inside and outside the passenger compartment,
perform the following preventive window demisting
procedure:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on
;
❒ turn ring nut C to
and consider moving to if
misting does not occur;
❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed.
IMPORTANT The climate control system is very
useful for preventing the windows from misting up in
the presence of high humidity since it dries the air
sent into the passenger compartment.
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING OF HEATED
REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRRORS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Press button A fig. 53 to activate this function; once
enabled, the light on the button comes on.
This function is timed and will deactivate
automatically after 20 minutes. Press button A again
to switch the function off.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on the inside of
the rear window over the heating filaments to avoid
damage.
fig. 52
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
F0N0500
51
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
INTERNAL AIR RECIRCULATION
ACTIVATION
SYSTEM SERVICING
Turn knob D to
.
It is advisable to switch the internal air recirculation
on while standing in queues or in tunnels to prevent
the introduction of polluted air. Do not use the
function for a long time, particularly if there are
many passengers on board, to prevent the windows
from misting up.
IMPORTANT Internal air recirculation makes it
possible to reach the required heating or cooling
conditions more quickly depending on the mode
selected.
Do not use the air recirculation function on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the
possibility of the windows misting.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
52
fig. 53
F0N0043
In winter, the climate control system must be turned
on at least once a month for about 10 minutes.
Before summer, have the system checked at a Fiat
Dealership.
Note The system uses R134a refrigerant fluid which
does not pollute the environment in the event of
accidental leakage. Never use R12 fluid, which is not
compatible with the system components.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
(for versions/markets, where provided)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The automatic climate control system adjusts the
temperature, the quantity and the distribution of the
air in the passenger compartment.
The temperature control is based on the "equivalent
temperature": in other words, the system
continuously works to keep the comfort level inside
the vehicle constant and to compensate for possible
variations in outside conditions, including the sun's
rays detected by a dedicated sensor.
The automatically controlled parameters and
functions are:
❒ air temperature at the vents;
❒ air distribution at the vents;
❒ fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow);
❒ compressor activation (for cooling/dehumidifying
the air);
❒ air recirculation.
All functions may be changed manually. In other
words, you may select one or more functions and
change the parameters as required. Automatic
control of the manually changed functions will be
suspended: the system will override your settings
only for safety-related reasons (e.g. risk of misting).
Manual selections will always take priority over
automatic settings and will be stored until the user
switches the system back to automatic operation by
pressing the AUTO button again except for the
cases in which the system will intervene for
particular, safety-related reasons.
You can adjust one function manually without
affecting the automatic control of the others.
The temperature of the air sent is always controlled
automatically, depending on the temperature set in
the display (except when the system is off or in
certain conditions when the compressor is switched
off ).
The system allows the following parameters and
functions to be set or altered manually: air
temperature, fan speed (continuous variation); air
distribution in seven positions; compressor
enablement; fast defrosting/demisting function; air
recirculation; switching off the system.
CONTROLS
A AUTO button automatic control of all functions.
B Air distribution selection button.
C Display.
D MAX DEF function control button.
E System off button.
F Compressor enabling/disabling button.
G Air recirculation control button.
H Fan speed increase/decrease control buttons.
I Temperature increase/decrease control knob.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
53
USING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
The system can be started in different ways, but it is
advisable to start by pressing the AUTO button
and then turning the knob to set the temperature
required on the display. The system will start running
automatically in this way and the set temperature
will be reached as quickly as possible. The system will
adjust the temperature, the quantity and the
distribution of the air sent into the passenger
compartment and, by managing the recirculation
function, the activation of the compressor. During
fully automatic operation the only manual
intervention required is the possible activation of the
following functions:
❒
air recirculation, to keep the function always
either on or off;
❒
to speed up demisting/defrosting of
windscreen, rear window and external rear view
mirrors.
During fully automatic system operation, you can
change the set temperatures, air distribution and fan
speed at any time by using the relevant buttons or
knobs: the system will automatically change its
settings to adjust to the new requirements. During
fully automatic operation (FULL AUTO), the word
FULL will disappear if the air distribution and/or flow
rate and/or engagement of the compressor and/or
recirculation settings are changed. In this way, the
functions will switch from automatic to manual
control until the AUTO button is pressed again.
With one or more functions turned on manually, the
adjustment of the intake air temperature continues
to be managed automatically, except with the
compressor switched off: if this is the case, the
temperature of the air sent into the passenger
compartment cannot be lower than that of the
outside air.
CONTROLS
Air temperature adjustment knob (I)
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Turn the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or lower the requested temperature in
the passenger compartment.
The temperature set is shown on the display.
Turn the knob either fully to the right or fully to the
left to the extreme HI or LO position to turn the
maximum heating or maximum cooling functions on:
❒ HI function (maximum heating): select by turning
the temperature knob clockwise beyond the
maximum value (32°C).
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
54
fig. 54
F0N0831
This function may be used to heat up the passenger
compartment by exploiting the system's potential
to the full. In this event, the system stops controlling
the temperature automatically and sets the air
mixing to maximum heating. The air speed
and distribution are fixed.
In particular, if the heating fluid is not sufficiently hot,
the maximum fan speed does not come on straight
away in order to limit the intake of insufficiently
hot air to the passenger compartment.
All manual settings will be allowed when this function
is on.
To switch the function off, simply turn the
temperature knob counterclockwise and set the
required temperature.
❒ LO function (maximum cooling): select by turning
the temperature knob anticlockwise beyond the
minimum value (16°C).
This function may be used to cool down the
passenger compartment, exploiting the system's
potential to the maximum. In this event, the system
stops controlling the temperature automatically
and sets the air mixing to maximum cooling. The air
speed and distribution are fixed. All manual settings
will be allowed when this function is on.
To switch the function off, simply turn the
temperature knob clockwise and set the required
temperature.
Air distribution buttons (B)
By pressing these buttons, it is possible to set one of
the seven possible air distributions manually:
Air flow to the windscreen and front side window
vents to demist or defrost them.
Air flow at central and side dashboard vents to
ventilate the chest and the face during the hot
season.
Air flow to the front and rear footwell vents.
Thanks to the natural tendency of hot air to rise, this
distribution pattern allows the passenger
compartment to warm up as quickly as possible,
providing an immediate feeling of warmth.
Air flow distributed between footwell vents
(hotter air) and central and side dashboard vents
(cooler air). This distribution mode is particularly
useful in spring and autumn on sunny days.
Air flow distributed between the footwell vents
and the windscreen and front side window
defrosting/demisting vents. This allows an adequate
warming of the passenger compartment and prevents
the windows from steaming up.
Air flow distribution split between the
windscreen and front side windows defrosting/
demisting vents and the central and side dashboard
vents as well as the footwell vents. This distribution
makes it possible to maintain good levels of comfort
and keep the passenger compartment sufficiently
cool (useful in the summer).
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
55
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
56
Air flow distributed between windscreen and
front side window defroster/demister and central
and side dashboard vents. This distribution allows
good air diffusion and maintains a good level of
comfort both in summer and winter.
The distribution set is shown by the corresponding
LEDs in the selected buttons coming on.
To restore automatic control of the air distribution
after a manual selection, press the AUTO button.
Fan speed adjustment buttons (H)
Press the H button to increase or to decrease the
fan speed and therefore the amount of air sent into
the passenger compartment, though the required
temperature remains set.
The fan speed is shown by the lit bars on the display:
❒ Maximum fan speed = all the bars lit up;
❒ Minimum fan speed = one bar lit up.
The fan can be turned off only if the climate control
compressor has been switched off by pressing the
F button fig. 54.
IMPORTANT To restore automatic control of the fan
speed after a manual adjustment, press the AUTO
button.
IMPORTANT At high vehicle speeds, the dynamic
effect may increase the flow of air into the passenger
compartment which in this case will not directly
correspond to the fan speed bar display.
AUTO button (A) (automatic operation)
Press the AUTO button to make the system
automatically adjust the quantity and distribution of
the air introduced into the passenger compartment.
All previous manual settings will be cancelled.
The message FULL AUTO will appear on the front
display in this condition.
By manually adjusting at least one of the functions
automatically managed by the system (air
recirculation, air distribution, fan speed or switching
off the air conditioner compressor), the word FULL
will disappear from the display, indicating that the
system is no longer automatically controlling all the
functions (the temperature will still be controlled
automatically).
IMPORTANT Should the system (after manual
settings) no longer be able to guarantee the required
temperature set in the passenger compartment,
the set temperature value will start flashing to
indicate the difficulties the system is experiencing
and then the word AUTO will disappear.
To restore system automatic control at any time,
after one or more manual adjustments, press the
AUTO button.
Air recirculation on/off button (G)
The air recirculation is managed according to the
following operating logics:
❒ override on (inside air recirculation always on),
indicated by the LED on button G and the
symbol on the display;
❒ override off (air recirculation constantly off with
air intake from the outside), signalled by the LED
in the button switching off and by the
symbol in
the display disappearing.
These operating conditions are obtained by pressing
air recirculation button G in sequence.
IMPORTANT The engagement of the air
recirculation system makes it possible to reach the
required heating or cooling conditions faster.
It is however not advisable to use recirculation on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the
possibility of the windows steaming up, especially
if the climate control compressor is off.
The recirculation is forced off (air is introduced from
the outside) when the outside temperature is cold
to prevent misting.
It is advisable not to use the air recirculation function
when the outside temperature is low, because the
windows could rapidly steam up.
Climate control compressor enablement/off
button (F)
Press the button to switch the climate control
compressor off (if on). The icon on the display will
switch off.
Press the button when the LED is off to restore
automatic system control and use of the compressor.
The icon will light up on the display in this case.
The system will switch the recirculation off when the
compressor is switched off to prevent the windows
misting up. Although the system is capable of
maintaining the required temperature, the word
FULL will disappear from the display. If, on the other
hand, it is no longer capable of maintaining the
temperature, the letters flash and the word AUTO
goes out.
IMPORTANT With the compressor off, it is not
possible to introduce air cooler than ambient
temperature into the passenger compartment.
Furthermore, in certain conditions, the windows
could mist up rapidly because the air is not
dehumidified.
The system remembers that the compressor has
been switched off, even after the engine has stopped.
To restore automatic compressor control, press
the √ button again (in this case, the system will only
work as a heater) or press the AUTO button.
With the compressor switched off, if the outside
temperature is higher than the one set, the system is
not capable of satisfying this request.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
57
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
58
This is signalled by the target temperature flashing,
after which the word AUTO goes out.
With the climate control compressor off, the fan
speed can be set to zero manually (no bar shown).
With the compressor enabled and the engine
started, the fan speed may be reduced only to the
minimum setting (one bar shown).
Button for rapid window demisting/defrosting
(D)
Press this button and the climate control system will
automatically switch on all the functions required
for fast windscreen and side window demisting/
defrosting:
❒ switches on climate control compressor when
climatic conditions are suitable;
❒ air recirculation off;
❒ maximum air temperature HI in both areas;
❒ sets the fan speed according to the engine coolant
temperature to limit the flow of air that is not
sufficiently warm to demist the windows;
❒ directs air flow to windscreen and front side
windows vents;
❒ heated rear window on.
IMPORTANT The rapid demisting/defrosting function
for the windows remains on for about 3 minutes
from when the engine coolant reaches the
appropriate temperature for a rapid demisting of the
windows.
When this function is active, the LED on the
corresponding button and the one on the heated
rear window button switch on. The message FULL
AUTO goes off on the display.
You can only adjust the fan speed and switch the
heated rear window off manually when this function
is active.
To restore the previous operating conditions, simply
press button B, air recirculation button G,
compressor button F or AUTO button A.
Note To guarantee rapid demisting/defrosting, if an
additional heater/air conditioner is present (under
the front or rear seat on Panorama and Combi
versions), if activated, deactivate it using the button F
(LED off) located in the control panel F fig. 55.
Switching off the system OFF (E)
Press button E to switch the climate control system
off. The display will go out.
The following climate control conditions will be
present when the system is off:
❒ display off;
❒ temperature setting not displayed;
❒ air recirculation on, thereby insulating the
passenger compartment from the outside
(recirculation LED on);
❒ climate control compressor off;
❒ fan off.
Press the AUTO button to switch the climate
control system back on in full automatic mode.
ADDITIONAL HEATER
(for versions/markets, where provided)
On some versions, an additional heater is also
present beneath the driver's seat. The fan for this
heater is operated by means of the button F located
on the control panel fig. 55.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 55
F0N0500
59
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
INDEPENDENT SUPPLEMENTARY
HEATER
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The vehicle is available, on request, with two
different independent heaters: one fully automatic,
the other which can be programmed.
AUTOMATIC VERSION
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
The additional heater is turned on in automatic
mode when the engine is started and the required
outside temperature and coolant conditions are
present. Deactivation is always automatic.
IMPORTANT During periods with low outdoor
temperatures when the device cuts in, check that the
fuel level is always higher than the reserve level.
Otherwise the device could lock and require the
assistance of a Fiat Dealership.
PROGRAMMABLE VERSION
The additional heater operates completely
independently of engine operation and allows the
following:
❒ heating the passenger compartment with the
engine off
❒ defrosting the windows;
❒ heat the engine coolant and then the engine itself
prior to starting.
The system consists of:
❒ a diesel burner for heating the water with an
exhaust silencer for the combustion gases;
❒ a metering pump connected to the reservoir pipes
for supplying the burner;
❒ a heat exchanger connected to the engine cooling
system pipes;
WARNING
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
The heater burns fuel in the same way
as the engine, though to a lesser extent.
To prevent poisoning and asphyxiation, the
supplementary heater must never be turned on,
even for short periods, in closed environments
such as a garage or workshops without
extraction fans for the exhaust gases.
INDEX
60
fig. 56
F0N0150
❒ a control unit connected to the passenger
compartment heating/ventilation system to allow
automatic operation;
❒ an electronic control unit for controlling and
adjusting the built-in burner;
❒ a digital timer A fig. 56 for turning the heater on
manually or for programming the time that it
comes on.
The additional heater (during winter) heats,
maintains the temperature of and circulates engine
coolant for a set time period in order to ensure
optimum engine and passenger compartment
conditions at engine start-up.
The heater can operate automatically when
programmed with a digital timer or manually by
pressing the “immediate heating” button on the
timer.
After heater activation, either programmed or
manual, the electronic control unit operates the
liquid circulation pump and ignites the burner in
accordance with the preset, controlled procedures.
The circulation pump output is also controlled by the
electronic control unit in order to minimise the
initial heating time.
When the system operates, the control unit turns on
the passenger compartment heater unit fan at the
second speed.
The thermal power of the boiler is regulated
automatically by the electronic control unit
depending on the temperature of the engine coolant.
IMPORTANT The heater is equipped with a thermal
limiter that cuts off combustion in the case of
overheating due to insufficient coolant/coolant leaks.
In this case, after repairing the fault in the cooling
system and/or topping up the fluid, press the
program selection button before turning the heater
back on.
The heater can turn off spontaneously due to
misfiring after start-up or because the flame goes out
during operation. In this case, carry out the turning
off procedure and try to turn the heater back on. If it
still does not work, consult a Fiat Dealership.
Activation of the heating system
When an automatic climate control system is
present, the control unit sets the air temperature
and distribution when the heater is turned on from
the park position. When a manual heater/climate
control is present, to obtain maximum heater
efficiency, check that the passenger compartment
heating/ventilation temperature adjustment knob is in
the 'hot air' position.
To prioritise passenger compartment pre-heating, set
the air distribution knob to the position.
To prioritise windscreen defrosting, set the air
position.
distribution knob to the
To obtain both functions, set the air distribution
knob to the position.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
61
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Digital timer fig. 57
Heating turned on immediately fig. 58
1) Heater cycle warning light
2) Display lighting
3) Clock preselection recall number
4) Clock button
5) Hour forward adjustment button
6) Programme selection button
7) Hour back adjustment button
8) Immediate heating activation button
9) Time adjustment/reading warning light
To switch the system on manually, press button 8 of
the timer: the display and warning light 1 will light
up and remain on for the entire time that the system
is working.
Programmed activation of heating
Before programming system activation, it is essential
to set the time.
Setting the current time
❒ Press button 4: the display and warning light 9 will
switch on fig. 59;
❒ Within 10 seconds, press buttons 5 or 7 to select
the exact time.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
When the display switches off, the current time is
stored.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
62
fig. 57
F0N0151
fig. 58
F0N0152
Holding down the buttons 5 or 7 will move the digits
on the clock forwards or backwards faster.
IMPORTANT If you wish to recall other preselected
times, press button 6 from time to time within 10
seconds.
Reading the current time fig. 59
– within 10 seconds, press the buttons 5 or 7 to
select the desired switching on time.
To read the current time, press button 4: the time
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds
and warning light 9 will come on at the same time.
Programming the switching on time fig. 60
Activation can be programmed with an advance
of between 1 minute and 24 hours. Three different
activation times may be selected, but only one can be
activated for each pre-heating cycle.
To program the activation time:
❒ press button 6: the symbol 10 or the time set
previously and the number 3 corresponding to the
preselection recalled will light up in the display
for 10 seconds.
IMPORTANT The confirmation that the time has
been memorised is given by:
❒ the disappearance of the switching on time;
❒ the presence of the preselection number 3;
❒ the lighting of the display.
IMPORTANT When the boiler comes on:
❒ the flame warning light 1 switches on in the
display;
❒ the preselection number 3 goes out.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 59
F0N0153
fig. 60
F0N0154
63
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
Deactivation of the programmed switching on
time fig. 60
To delete the programmed activation time, press
button 6 briefly: the display lighting will go off and
the number 3 relating to the preselected time will
disappear.
Recalling one of the preselected switching on
times fig. 61
Press the button 6 as many times as necessary until
the number 3 corresponding to the desired
programmed activation time appears on the display.
After 10 seconds, the time will disappear from
the display and remain stored and the number 3 will
light up in the display.
IMPORTANT The programmed switching on time
can be altered or cancelled by following the
instructions given previously.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Deactivation of the system, depending on the type of
activation (automatic or manual), may be:
❒ automatic, at the end of the preset engagement
time (60 minutes with red display lighting);
❒ manual pressing the “immediate heating” button
on the timer again (flame button 1).
In both cases the heating warning light and the
display lighting go off, the passenger compartment
heater fan is turned off and the combustion stops.
The fluid circulation pump continues to work for
around two minutes to dissipate as much heat as
possible; the heater can be turned back on during
this stage.
WARNING
The heater burns fuel in the same way
as the engine, though to a lesser extent.
To prevent poisoning and asphyxiation, the
supplementary heater must never be turned on,
even for short periods, in closed environments
such as a garage or workshops without
extraction fans for the exhaust gases.
IMPORTANT The parking heater goes off when
battery voltage is low to allow the vehicle to be
started.
INDEX
64
Switching the heating system off
fig. 61
F0N0155
IMPORTANT Before turning on the device, ensure
that the fuel level is above the reserve. Otherwise
the device could lock and require the assistance of a
Fiat Dealership.
- Always turn off the heater when refuelling and near
service stations to avoid the risk of explosion or
fire hazards.
- Do not park the vehicle on inflammable material
such as paper, grass or dry leaves: fire hazard!
- The temperature near the heater should not
exceed 120°C (e.g. during oven painting in a body
shop). The electronic control unit components may
be damaged at higher temperatures.
- Whilst the heater is operating with the engine
switched off, it absorbs energy from the battery; the
engine should therefore be left running for a while
to make sure that the battery is properly recharged.
- To check the coolant level, follow the instructions
in the "Vehicle maintenance" chapter, "Engine coolant
system fluid" paragraph. The water in the heating
circuit must contain a minimum percentage of 10%
antifreeze.
- For maintenance and repairs, consult only a Fiat
Dealership and use only original parts.
MAINTENANCE
Have the additional heater checked regularly at a Fiat
Dealership (and always at the start of every winter).
This will guarantee safe and economic operation
of the heater as well as a long duration.
ADDITIONAL REAR HEATING (Panorama
and Combi)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The Panorama and Combi versions are equipped
with a main heating system plus an additional system
(available on request) with controls in the roof
lining above the second row of seats fig. 62.
In order to work the system must be enabled
through the button F fig. 63 on the control panel.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 62
F0N0233
65
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
Turn the knob D to the maximum cold position
(knob at blue sector); air at ambient temperature will
come out of the rear footwell vents (located under
the seats in the 2nd and 3rd row for Panorama
versions and the grille on the left wheel arch side for
Combi versions);
Turn the knob D to the maximum heating position
(knob at red sector);warm air will emerge (with
the engine warmed up), from the rear footwell
outlets (located under the seats in the 2nd and 3rd
row for Panorama versions and the grille on the
left wheel arch side for Combi versions).
ADDITIONAL REAR CLIMATE CONTROL
(Panorama and Combi)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The Panorama and Combi versions are equipped
with a main heating/air conditioning system plus an
additional system (available on request) with controls
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
66
fig. 63
F0N0500
in the roof lining above the second row of seats
fig. 62. Button F fig. 63 in the control panel must be
enabled for operation; the air conditioning only
works if the main air conditioner is on.
❒ When the knob D is placed in the fully cold
position (control in blue sector) cold air comes
out the vents in the ceiling.
❒ Turn the knob D to the maximum heating position
(knob at red sector);warm air will emerge (with
the engine warmed up), from the rear footwell
outlets (located under the seats in the 2nd and 3rd
row for Panorama versions and the grille on the
left wheel arch side for Combi versions).
❒ If the selector knob D is placed in the intermediate
positions, the air will be distributed between the
vents in the ceiling and the rear footwell vents,
varying the temperature.
IMPORTANT If the compressor on the main air
conditioner control is turned on (operation of
button E), even if the additional air conditioner fan is
in position 0, the 1st speed will automatically be
activated to prevent ice formation, with possible
damage to the component.
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
If the daytime running lights are deactivated, no light
comes on when the ring nut is turned to O.
The left lever includes the controls for the external
lights.
The external lights can only be switched on when the
ignition key is in the ON position.
LIGHTS OFF
Ring nut turned to position O fig. 64.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
With the ignition key turned to MAR-ON and the
ring nut turned to position O fig. 64 the daytime
running lights are automatically activated; the other
lights and interior lighting remain off. The automatic
operation of the daytime running lights can be
activated/deactivated via the display menu
(see "Multifunction Display" in this chapter).
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
WARNING
The daytime running lights are an
alternative to the dipped beam
headlights for driving during the daytime in
countries where it is compulsory to have lights
on during the day, and they are also permitted
in those countries where this not obligatory.
Daytime running lights cannot replace dipped
beam headlights when driving at night or
through tunnels.The use of daytime running
lights is governed by the highway code of the
country in which you are driving. Comply with
legal requirements.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 64
F0N0501
67
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS/SIDE LIGHTS
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS
With the ignition key turned to MAR-ON, turn the
ring nut to
fig. 65.
If dipped beams are activated, the daytime running
lights go out and the side lights and dipped beam
headlights come on.
The warning light
on the instrument panel
switches on.
When the ignition key is turned to STOP or
removed and the ring nut is turned from O to
, all
the side lights and number plate lights come on.
The
warning light will come on in the
instrument panel.
, pull the stalk
When the ring nut is in position
towards the steering wheel (2nd unstable position)
fig. 66.
The warning light
on the instrument panel
switches on.
To turn the main beams off, pull again the lever
towards the steering wheel (dipped beams will turn
on again).
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
68
fig. 65
F0N0502
fig. 66
F0N0503
FLASHING
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (1st
unstable position) fig. 67 regardless of the position of
switches on on
the ring nut. The warning light
the instrument panel.
Place the lever in the (stable) position fig. 68:
❒ up (position 1): activates the right direction
indicator;
❒ down (position 2): activates the left direction
indicator.
Warning light F or D should flash in the instrument
panel.
Direction indicators switch off automatically when
the vehicle is back in a straight line.
PARKING LIGHTS
These lights can only be turned on with ignition key
in STOP position or removed, by moving the left
stalk ring nut first to position O and then to position
or
.
The warning light
on the instrument panel
switches on.
Lane change function
If you wish to signal a lane change, put the left stalk
in the unstable position for less than half a second.
The direction indicator on the side selected will flash
five times and then switch off automatically.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 67
F0N0504
fig. 68
F0N0505
69
"FOLLOW ME HOME" DEVICE
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
This device allows the illumination of the space in
front of the vehicle for a preset time.
Activation
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
With the ignition key on OFF or removed, pull the
stalk towards the steering wheel fig. 69 within 2
minutes from when the engine is turned off.
At each single movement of the stalk, the lights will
remain on for an extra 30 seconds up to a maximum
of 210 seconds; then the lights are switched off
automatically.
The warning light
on the instrument panel will
light up and the corresponding message will appear in
the display (see “Warning lights and messages”) for
as long as the function is activated.
IN AN EMERGENCY
The light comes on when the stalk is first moved and
stays on until the function is automatically
deactivated.
Each movement of the stalk increases only the
amount of time the lights stay on.
Deactivation
Keep the stalk pulled towards the steering wheel for
more than 2 seconds.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT SENSOR (dusk
sensor)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
It detects variations in brightness outside the vehicle
depending on the light sensitivity setting: the greater
the sensitivity, the less outside light needed to
activate the external lights being turned on.
The sensitivity of the dusk sensor is adjusted by
means of the "Setup menu" of the display.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
70
fig. 69
F0N0506
fig. 70
F0N0507
Activation
WINDOW CLEANING
Turn the ring nut to position
fig. 70: this turns the
side lights and the dipped beam headlights on
simultaneously and automatically depending on the
exterior brightness conditions.
Deactivation
The main beam headlights will go out followed by the
side lights after approximately 10 seconds, when
the sensor is deactivated.
The sensor is not capable of detecting the presence
of fog therefore, in these circumstances, the lights
have to be turned on manually.
The right stalk fig. 71 controls windscreen
wiper/washer operation.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 71
F0N0038
71
WINDSCREEN WASHER/WIPER
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
They can be operated only with the ignition key
turned to MAR-ON.
The right stalk can be moved to five different
positions:
A windscreen wiper off.
B intermittent operation.
With the lever in position B, turn control F to select
one of four different speeds for the intermittent
operation mode:
very slow intermittent operation.
slow
intermittent operation.
-- - - medium intermittent operation
- - - - fast intermittent operation.
C continuous slow operation.
D continuous fast operation
E temporary fast operation (unstable position).
Temporary fast operation position E is limited to the
time that the lever is manually held in this position.
The lever returns to position A when it is released,
automatically stopping the windscreen wipers.
Never use the windscreen wipers to
remove layers of snow or ice from the
windscreen. In such conditions, the
windscreen wipers may be subjected to excessive
stress and the overload cut-out, which prevents
operation for a few seconds, may intervene. If
rear window wiper operation is not restored,
contact a Fiat Dealership.
“Smart washing” function
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel (unstable
position) to operate the windscreen washer fig. 72.
Keeping the stalk pulled for more than half a second,
with just one movement it is possible to operate
the washer jet and the wiper at the same time.
The wiper stops working three strokes after the
stalk is released.
IMPORTANT Replace the wiper blades as specified in
the “Maintenance and care” section.
INDEX
72
fig. 72
F0N0039
A further stroke after approximately 5 seconds
completes the wiping cycle.
RAIN SENSOR
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The rain sensor is located behind the rear-view
mirror in contact with the windscreen and has the
purpose of automatically adjusting the frequency
of the windscreen wiper strokes depending on the
intensity of the rain during intermittent operation.
IMPORTANT Keep the glass in the sensor area clean.
Activation fig. 71
Move the right lever down by one click (position B).
The activation of the sensor is signalled by a "stroke"
to show that the command has been acquired.
Turn the ring nut F to increase the rain sensor
sensitivity.
The increasing of the rain sensor sensitivity is also
signalled by a stroke of the wipers.
If the windscreen washer is used with the rain sensor
activated, the normal washing cycle is performed,
after which the rain sensor resumes its normal
automatic operation.
Deactivation fig. 71
Move the lever from position B or turn the ignition
key to OFF. The next time the vehicle is started
(ignition key in ON position), the sensor is not
reactivated even if the lever is still in position B.
To activate the sensor, move the lever to position A
or C and then back to position B or turn the ring nut
for adjusting the sensitivity. Rain sensor activation
will be indicated by at least one wiper “stroke” even
if the windscreen is dry.
The rain sensor is capable of recognising the
difference between day and night and making the
necessary adjustments automatically.
WARNING
Streaks of water may cause unnecessary
blade movements.
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Headlight washers are “retractable”, i.e. they are
located inside the front bumpers and they are
activated when (with dipped beams on) the
windscreen washer is operated.
IMPORTANT Check the correct condition and
cleanliness of nozzles at regular intervals.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
73
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
CRUISE CONTROL
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This is an electronic driving aid that allows you to
drive at a speed of above 30 km/h on long and
straight dry roads with few driving changes (e.g.
motorways) at a preset speed without having to
press the accelerator pedal. It is therefore not
recommended to use this device on extra-urban
roads with traffic. Do not use it in town.
Switching the device on
Turn the ring nut A to the ON position.
The Cruise Control cannot be engaged in 1st or
reverse gear. It is advisable to engage it in 4th or
higher gears.
When travelling downhill with the device engaged,
the vehicle speed may slightly exceed the memorised
one.
Storing vehicle speed
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn ring nut A fig. 73 to ON and press the
accelerator pedal so that the vehicle reaches the
desired speed;
❒ move the stalk upwards (+) for at least one
second, then release it: the vehicle speed is
memorised and you can therefore release the
accelerator pedal.
If necessary (when overtaking for instance)
acceleration is possible by simply pressing the
accelerator pedal: releasing the accelerator pedal, the
car will return to the speed memorised previously.
Restoring the set speed
If the device has been deactivated, for example by
depressing the brake or clutch pedal, the set speed
can be restored as follows:
❒ accelerate progressively until a speed close to that
stored is reached;
❒ engage the gear selected at the time that the
speed was stored;
❒ press button B fig. 73.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
74
When the device is activated the warning light
comes on together with the relevant message on
the instrument panel.
fig. 73
F0N0508
Increasing the stored speed
Deactivating the device
This can be carried out in two ways:
❒ by pressing the accelerator and storing the new
speed reached
or
❒ by moving the stalk upwards (+).
Each movement of the stalk corresponds to an
increase in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the
stalk held upwards will continuously increase the
speed.
The device can be deactivated by the driver in the
following ways:
❒ by turning ring nut A to the OFF position
❒ by stopping the engine
Decreasing the stored speed
This can be carried out in two ways:
❒ by switching off the device and then storing the
new speed;
or
❒ by moving the stalk downwards (-) until the new
speed, which will be stored automatically, is
reached.
Each movement of the lever corresponds to a
reduction in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping
the stalk held downwards will decrease the speed
continuously.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Deactivating the function
The device can be deactivated by the driver in the
following ways:
❒ by turning ring nut A to the OFF position
❒ by stopping the engine
❒ by pressing the brake pedal or operating the
handbrake
❒ by pressing the clutch pedal
❒ requesting a gear shift with an automatic
transmission in sequential mode
❒ with the vehicle speed below the set limit
❒ by pressing the accelerator pedal; in this case the
system is not actually turned off but the
acceleration request takes priority; the cruise
control remains activated, without the need to
press the RES button to restore the previous
conditions once the acceleration is over.
The device is automatically switched off in the
following cases:
❒ if the ABS or ESP systems cut in;
❒ in the event of system failure.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
75
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
WARNING
When travelling with the device active,
never move the gear lever to neutral.
WARNING
If the device is faulty, turn ring nut A to
OFF, check the condition of the fuse and
contact a Fiat Dealership.
ROOF LIGHTS
FRONT ROOF LIGHT WITH SPOT LIGHTS
Switch A fig. 74 switches the roof lights on/off. With
the switch A in the middle position, the lights C
and D go on/off when front doors are opened/
closed. With switch A pressed to the left, the lights
C and D are always off. With switch A pressed to
the right, the lights C and D are always on.
Lights switch on/off progressively.
The switch B is a spot light; when the ceiling light is
off, it switches the following on individually:
❒ light C if pressed on the left side;
❒ light D if pressed on the right side.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
76
fig. 74
F0N0041
IMPORTANT Before getting out of the vehicle, make
sure that both switches are in the middle position;
when the doors are closed, the lights switch off
preventing the battery from running flat.
In any case, if the switch is left in the on position, the
roof light switches off automatically 15 minutes
after the engine is stopped.
Roof light timing
On certain versions, to facilitate getting in/out of the
vehicle at night or in poorly-lit areas, 2 timed modes
have been provided.
TIMING WHEN GETTING INTO THE VEHICLE
The roof lights switch on as follows:
❒ for around 10 seconds when the front doors are
unlocked;
❒ for about 3 minutes when one of the side doors is
opened;
❒ for about 10 seconds when the doors are closed.
The timed period is interrupted when the ignition
is turned to MAR-ON.
TIMING WHEN GETTING OUT OF THE VEHICLE
After removing the key from the ignition, the roof
lights switch on as follows:
❒ within 2 minutes of the engine being switched off
for a period of around 10 seconds;
❒ when one of the side doors is opened for a period
of around 3 minutes;
❒ when one of the doors is closed for a period of
about 10 seconds.
The timed period stops automatically when the
doors are locked.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
LOAD COMPARTMENT REAR ROOF LIGHT
This is located above the rear door. Press the cover
at the point shown in fig. 75 to switch it on.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 75
F0N0042
77
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
LOAD COMPARTMENT SIDE ROOF LIGHT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
CONTROLS
Press the cover at the point shown in fig. 76 to
switch it on.
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
REMOVABLE ROOF LIGHT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
They are turned on by pressing switch A fig. 78,
regardless of the position of the ignition key.
It is used as both a fixed light and a portable electric
torch.
When the removable light is secured to its fixed
support fig. 77, the electric torch battery is
automatically recharged.
With the vehicle stationary and the ignition key
either turned to STOP or removed, the roof light is
recharged for a maximum of 15 minutes.
IN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 77
F0N0220
fig. 78
F0N0044
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
78
fig. 76
F0N0219
Warning lights and are lit up in the instrument
panel when this device is activated. Press switch
A again to turn the lights off.
IMPORTANT The use of hazard warning lights is
governed by the highway code of the country you are
in. Comply with legal requirements.
Emergency braking
(for versions/markets where provided)
FOG LIGHTS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To turn the lights on, press the
button with the
side lights on fig. 79. The
warning light on the
panel switches on.
Press the button again to turn the lights off.
The use of fog lights is governed by the Highway
Code of the country you are in. Comply with legal
requirements.
In the event of emergency braking the hazard
warning lights come on automatically, as do the
and warning lights in the panel. The function
switches off automatically when the nature of the
braking changes. This function complies with the
relevant legislation currently in force.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 79
F0N0045
79
REAR FOG LIGHT
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
These lights come on, with the dipped headlights on
or with the side lights and fog lights on (for
versions/markets, where provided) by pressing the
button fig. 80. The warning light on the panel
switches on. Press the button again to turn the lights
off, or turn off the dipped beams and/or the front
fog lights (where provided). The use of rear fog lamps
is governed by the Highway Code of the country
you are in. Comply with legal requirements.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Press button A fig. 81 to activate. The device will be
switched off automatically after approximately 20
minutes.
PARKING LIGHTS
These lights can only be turned on with ignition key
in STOP position or removed, by moving the left
stalk ring nut first to position O and then to position
or
. The
warning light will come on in
the instrument panel.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
80
fig. 80
F0N0046
fig. 81
F0N0043
BATTERY DISCONNECTION FUNCTION
(DISCONNECTOR)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The battery disconnection function is enabled with
the ignition key in the BATT position, as illustrated
on the dedicated plate located in the area illustrated
in fig. 82.
fig. 82
F0N0811
To turn the ignition key to BATT position, press
button A (red) fig. 83.
The battery will be disconnected, by interrupting the
earth lead, about 45 seconds after the key is turned
to the BATT position.
This 45 second period is necessary to:
❒ allow the driver to get out of the vehicle and lock
the doors using the remote control;
❒ guarantee that all the vehicle electrical systems
have been deactivated.
With the battery disconnected, access to the vehicle
will only be possible by unlocking the driver's door
using the mechanical lock.
To restore the battery connection, insert the ignition
key and turn it to MAR-ON; the vehicle can be
started normally at this point.
If the battery is disconnected, it may be necessary to
set certain electrical devices again (e.g. clock, date,
etc.).
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 83
F0N0810
81
CENTRAL LOCKING
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
To lock all doors at the same time, press button A
fig. 84, located on the centre console control panel,
regardless of the position of the ignition key.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 84
F0N0047
fig. 85
F0N0132
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
82
Press button B fig. 84 to release the doors.
The electric window panel features a button D fig. 85
which independently unlocks/locks the load
compartment.
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY AND
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
The vehicle is fitted with a safety switch that, in the
event of a crash, comes into operation by cutting
off the fuel supply and turning off the engine as
a consequence.
When the inertia switch cuts in, this cuts off the fuel
supply and also activates the hazard warning lights,
side lights and roof lights while releasing all the doors
and displaying a message; they are deactivated by
pressing button A. An additional safety switch is also
present that is activated in the event of impact to
cut off the electrical supply. In this way, fuel is
prevented from escaping if the pipes are broken to
stop the formation of sparks or electrical discharges
following damage to the vehicle electrical
components.
WARNING
If, after a crash, you smell fuel or see
leaks from the fuel system, do not reset
the switches to avoid fire risk.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Reactivating the fuel cut-off switch
Press button A to reactivate the fuel cut-off
switchfig. 86.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
IMPORTANT After an accident, remember to
remove the key from the ignition device to avoid
draining the battery. If no fuel leaks or damage
to vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) are
detected after the impact and the vehicle is able to
set off again, reactivate the automatic fuel cut off and
electrical supply switches (for versions/markets
where provided) following the procedure described
below.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 86
F0N0048
83
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Reactivating the electrical supply cut-off
switch (School bus/Minibus)
The switch is located on the positive battery
terminal fig. 87.
To reactivate the electrical supply switch, proceed as
follows:
❒ press button A to reset the fuel cut-off switch;
❒ press button B to reset the electrical supply
switch.
WARNING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Before reactivating the electrical supply
switch, carefully check for fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle's electrical devices (e.g.
headlights).
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
84
fig. 87
F0N0127
WARNING
Before reactivating the fuel cut-off
switch, carefully check for fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle's electrical devices (e.g.
headlights).
IMPORTANT On versions other than School
bus/Minibus, button B is replaced by a dedicated fuse;
to replace it contact a Fiat Dealership
INTERIOR FITTINGS
To open the glove compartment, use the opening
handle.
The compartment is big enough to hold a laptop
computer.
UPPER STORAGE COMPARTMENT REFRIGERATED COMPARTMENT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To use, lift the flap as shown in fig. 88.
If air conditioned, the compartment, equipped with a
bottle holder, may be cooled/heated by means of an
outlet connected to the climate control system.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
To open the glove compartment, operate the
opening handle A fig. 89.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
GLOVE COMPARTMENT WITH LOCK
Turn the key clockwise/anticlockwise to lock/unlock
the lock fig. 90.
fig. 89
F0N0050
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 88
F0N0049
fig. 90
F0N0051
85
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Compartment A fig. 91 is located in the middle of
the dashboard.
Compartment B fig. 92 is located on the right of the
dashboard above the glove compartment.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
86
fig. 91
F0N0511
fig. 92
F0N0053
DOOR POCKETS
There are oddment/document pockets located in
each of the door panels fig. 94.
Certain outfits are equipped with a protective grille
on the window of the partition inside the load
compartment.
COMPARTMENT BENEATH PASSENGER
SIDE FRONT SEAT
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Proceed as follows to use the compartment:
❒ Open the flap A fig. 95 and remove it as illustrated;
❒ turn the lock knob B anticlockwise and remove it
to allow the removal of the compartment.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
REAR PARTITION
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
The vehicle may be equipped with a solid rear
partition or with a sliding glass partition.
To open/close the sliding glass partition use the knob
A fig. 96.
fig. 95
F0N0134
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 94
F0N0128
fig. 96
F0N0218
87
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
CUP HOLDER - CAN HOLDER
CIGAR LIGHTER
The cup/can holder is located in the centre of the
dashboard fig. 97.
It is located in the centre of the dashboard fig. 98.
Press button on the cigar lighter to switch it on
when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON.
After about 15 seconds the button will return to its
original position automatically and the cigar lighter
is ready for use.
SAFETY
IMPORTANT Always check that the cigar lighter is
switched off.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
The cigar lighter gets very hot. Handle it
carefully and make sure that children
don't touch it: risk of fire and/or burning.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
88
fig. 97
F0N0054
fig. 98
F0N0055
ASHTRAY
The ashtray is a removable plastic container fig. 99
that can be fitted in the cup/can holders in the centre
of the dashboard.
IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtray as a waste
paper basket at the same time: fire hazard.
POWER SOCKET
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The cigar lighter and the power socket are located in
the centre console.
To use it, open cover A fig. 101.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
SUN VISORS
STARTING AND
DRIVING
These are located at the sides of the rear-view
mirror fig. 100.
They may be positioned at the front and at the side.
A vanity mirror is fitted on the passenger side sun
visor on all versions.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
fig. 100
F0N0056
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 99
F0N0146
fig. 101
F0N0057
89
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
DESK/BOOK REST
(for versions/markets, where provided)
SHELF ABOVE THE CAB
(for versions/markets, where provided)
There is a desk A fig. 102 in the centre of the
dashboard above the radio compartment; on some
versions this desk can be used as a book rest by
raising the back section and resting it on the
dashboard as illustrated in the figure.
On versions with passenger side air bags, the desk is
fixed.
This is located above the driver's cab fig. 103 and is
designed to store light objects.
Maximum permitted load:
– localised : 10 kg
– distributed over the entire surface of the shelf: 20
kg
WARNING
Do not use the desk in vertical position
with the vehicle in motion.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
90
fig. 102
F0N0058
fig. 103
F0N0190
CAB GLOVE COMPARTMENT (CAPUCINE)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This is fitted above the sun visors fig. 104 and is
designed for quick and easy storage of light objects
(e.g. documents, road maps etc.).
Portable navigators to be fitted in the
housing in fig. 106 have a mechanical
release device activated by pressing the
two side buttons on the stem. Failure to operate
the release may damage the navigator housing.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
FLAP ON BENCH
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To use, pull tab A fig. 105 and lower the flap. The flap
is equipped with two cup holders and a support
surface with a paper holder clip.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
PORTABLE NAVIGATOR SOCKET
(for versions/markets, where provided)
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
It is located in the area of the dashboard as
illustrated in fig. 106 for connecting the portable
navigator.
fig. 105
F0N0149
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 104
F0N0191
fig. 106
F0N0512
91
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
CAMERA AND DISPLAY FOR REAR
VISIBILITY
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The parking camera system fig. 107 offers the driver
a view of the situation behind the vehicle by means
of a display A fig. 108 in the passenger compartment.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
The system consists of a camera installed in a plastic
casing on the rear roof crossmember, which also
includes a third brake light and a display in a plastic
casing housed in the upper glove compartment
console area.
The display has buttons (On/Off, brightness,
backlight); to use them, operate the release button
and move to the open position.
The rear view display is adjusted in mirror mode.
When not in use, it must be closed in the upper
oddments compartment console area.
ACTIVATION
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 107
F0N0217
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL WARNINGS
Area of visibility
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
The area of visibility may vary according to the
vehicle position (full load condition included),
according to the vehicle specification and according
to weather conditions (high brightness, rain, snow
and fog). Visibility may be reduced during poor
lighting or full load conditions.
INDEX
92
The system is activated with the ignition on and
reverse engaged or by means of a dedicated button.
If the vehicle is in motion, e.g. during a reversing
manoeuvre, the system will operate up to a speed of
approximately 15 km/h and go off when a speed of
approximately 18 km/h is exceeded.
When reverse is deactivated, the image will appear
on the display for a further 5 seconds.
fig. 108
F0N0214
The maximum cover area of the camera is around 3
m in length and about 5.5 m in width fig. 109.
Important usage information
To clean the camera, it is advisable to use a
non-abrasive cloth when the protective glass is dirty
or iced over (on the outside). It is absolutely
necessary to avoid using any tool for cleaning as this
could scratch the glass.
It is also advisable to use a dry non-abrasive cloth
when cleaning the display. The dust that settles
on the display may be removed with special brushes.
Avoid using any detergent for cleaning.
The display glass could break in the event of impact.
In this case, do not touch the liquid crystal that
emerges from the display. If this occurs, quickly wash
the contaminated parts with soap and water.
USER INTERFACE
The display user interface consists of fig. 110:
❒ Brightness adjustment: 2 buttons;
❒ Backlight adjustment: 2 buttons;
❒ ON/OFF button: this allows images from the
camera to be seen even with reverse gear not
engaged.
The system makes it possible to return to the initial
configuration, keeping the ON/OFF button pressed
for approximately 3 seconds with the system
deactivated. In this case, the ON/OFF key flashes
twice to confirm the operation.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 109
F0N0215
fig. 110
F0N0216
93
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
94
MESSAGES ON THE SCREEN
TACHOGRAPH
Messages are shown on the display under the
following conditions:
❒ An alert message is displayed during the 5 seconds
following reverse engagement.
❒ When a speed of approximately 18 km/h is
exceeded and only the activation button is ON,
the image disappears and a message reporting that
the system has gone into stand-by mode is
displayed for approximately 5 seconds.
❒ When a speed of approximately 18 km/h is
exceeded and reverse gear is engaged, the image
disappears and an alert message is displayed that
remains until the speed drops to approximately 15
km/h. In this case, the image is displayed again.
The system makes it possible to change the language
in which the text messages are displayed. For this
selection, with the system deactivated, press the
ON/OFF button and any other button
simultaneously and then select the language by
scrolling through the menu using the ON/OFF
button.
When the desired language is reached, wait for about
3 seconds so that it is stored.
For tachograph operation and use, consult the
owner handbook supplied by the device
manufacturer. The tachograph must be installed on
the vehicle when the vehicle weight (with or without
trailer) exceeds 3.5 tons.
IMPORTANT Anyone making changes to the
monitoring device or signal transmission system that
affects recording by the monitoring instrument,
particularly if this is done for purposes of fraud, may
be in breach of criminal or administrative state
regulations.
IMPORTANT If a tachograph is fitted, if the vehicle is
parked for more than 5 days, it is advisable to
disconnect the negative battery terminal to maintain
its charge.
IMPORTANT
Do not use abrasive detergents or solvents to clean
the device. To clean the outside of the device, use
a damp cloth or special products for the care of
synthetic materials.
The tachograph is installed and sealed by authorised
personnel: do not try and access the device or the
supply and recording leads in any way. It is the
responsibility of the owner of the vehicle on which
the tachograph is installed to check the device
regularly.
The check must be carried out at least every two
years and a test must be carried out to ensure that it
is working properly. Ensure that the data label is
renewed after every check and that the label
contains the specified data.
SPEED BLOCK
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The vehicle is equipped with a function that limits
the speed that can be set, when requested by the
user, to one of 4 preset values: 90, 100, 110 or 130
km/h.
This function must be activated/deactivated through
a Fiat Dealership.
Following the operation, a sticker will be applied to
the windscreen showing the maximum speed setting.
WARNING The speedometer could indicate a
higher maximum speed than the effective one, set by
the Dealership, in accordance with the regulations
in force.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
95
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SELF-LEVELLING AIR SUSPENSION
Manual adjustment is only available for a limited
number of times with the engine switched off.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The system only acts on the rear wheels.
The system maintains the rear ride setting for the
vehicle constant in any loading condition, while
ensuring a greater driving comfort. In addition, the
system allows the height of the vehicle to be
adjusted with the vehicle stationary, by selecting
from 7 different positions to facilitate access to the
rear compartment.
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
There are 7 pre-defined levels for the free height
from the ground: from “ride -3” to “ride 0” till “ride
+3”.
The multifunction display, located in the middle of
the instrument panel, can show the ride position.
Before manually adjusting with doors
open, make sure there is enough space
around the vehicle for this kind of
operation.
Pressing button A, for less than 1 second, selects the
next level up. Keeping button A pressed, for more
than 1 second, selects the maximum level directly:
“ride +3”.
Pressing button B, for less than 1 second, selects the
next level down. Keeping button B pressed, for
more than 1 second, selects the minimum
level directly: “ride -3”.
During the adjustment the LED located on the
button (A or B) corresponding to the direction of
travel, flashes.
Automatic adjustment
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
When moving, the system automatically shows that
the vehicle is in 'ride setting 0' and keeps it constant.
During the adjustment the LED located on the
button (A or B fig. 111) corresponding to the
direction of travel, flashes.
Manual adjustment
INDEX
96
With the vehicle stationary and the engine on or off,
the desired height level can be set.
fig. 111
F0N0677
If, after selecting a button, the LED remains lit up
(for about 5 seconds) rather than flashing, this means
that the adjustment is temporarily unavailable.
Possible causes may be as follows:
– insufficient air reserve: the function is restored by
starting the engine;
– the system has reached a threshold working
temperature: wait a few minutes to let it cool down
before operating the buttons again.
The level selected with the vehicle stationary is
maintained up to a speed of about 20 km/h; when
this speed is exceeded, the system will automatically
restore the normal level: “ride 0”.
DOORS
DOOR CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Locking from the outside
With the doors shut, press button on the remote
control fig. 112 - fig. 113or insert the metal insert
A in the lock of the door on the driver's side and
turn it clockwise. The doors will only be locked if all
doors are shut.
To extract the metal insert, press button B.
If one or more of the doors is open after the button
on the remote control is pressed, the direction
indicators and the LED in the button fig. 115 will
flash quickly for about 3 seconds. Buttons A and B
fig. 115 are disabled with the function active.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 112
F0N0800
97
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Pressing button on the remote control twice in
quick succession activates the dead lock device (see
"Dead lock").
Door unlocking from the outside
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Door locking/unlocking from the inside
Press the button A fig. 115 to lock the doors, press
button B to unlock the doors. The locking/unlocking
actions take place centrally (front and rear).
Briefly press button
fig. 112 or fig. 113,
according to the version, to remotely unlock the
front doors, switch on the roof lights in a timed
manner and flash the direction indicators.
Turn the key anticlockwise in the driver's door
fig. 114 to unlock all the doors. With the battery
disconnected, access to the vehicle will only be
possible by unlocking the driver's door using the
mechanical lock.
IN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 114
F0N0059
fig. 115
F0N0047
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
98
fig. 113
F0N0801
When the doors are locked, the LED in the button A
is on and pressing button B brings about central
unlocking of all the doors and turns off the warning
light. When the doors are unlocked, the LED is
off and pressing the button brings about central
locking of all the doors. The doors will be locked
only if all the doors are properly shut.
Following the locking of the doors using:
❒ remote control
❒ door pawl
they cannot be unlocked using the button A fig. 115
in the dashboard.
IMPORTANT With the central locking on, pulling the
opening lever for one of the front doors causes the
central locking to be switched off. Individual doors
can be unlocked by pulling the opening handle of one
of the rear doors.
In the absence of electrical power supply (blown
fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is still possible to
lock the doors manually.
After exceeding 20 km/h, all the doors will be locked
automatically if the setup menu function has been
selected (see “Multifunction display” paragraph in this
section).
LOAD COMPARTMENT BUTTON
Lock activation is indicated by the LED in the button.
The LED comes on in the following cases:
❒ after each door lock command generated by the
button D fig. 116 or by button in the dashboard;
❒ when the instrument panel is activated;
❒ upon opening of one of the front doors;
❒ when the door is locked at 20 km/h (if activated
from the menu).
The lock is turned off when one of the load
compartment doors is opened or on a door release
request (load compartment or centralised) or an
unlocking request from the remote control/door
catch.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 116
F0N0132
99
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
100
DEAD LOCK
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This safety device inhibits the operation of:
❒ interior handles
buttons A-B fig. 115 for locking unlocking
thereby preventing the opening of the doors from
inside the passenger compartment if there has been
a break in attempt (e.g. a window has been broken).
The dead lock device therefore offers the best
possible protection against break-in attempts. We
recommend engaging it whenever the vehicle is
parked and left unattended.
WARNING
Once the dead lock system is engaged it
is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle.Therefore, before engaging
the system check that there is no one left
inside. If the remote control battery is flat, the
system can be disengaged only by inserting
the key in either of the door locks as described
previously: in this case the device remains active
only for the rear doors.
Device activation
The dead lock device is automatically activated on
every door with two short presses on the button
on the key with remote control fig. 112.
Device activation is indicated by 3 flashes of the
direction indicators and a flash of the LED on button
A fig. 115 on the dashboard.
If one or more of the doors is not perfectly shut, the
dead lock device will not be activated, thus
preventing a person getting into the vehicle through
the open door and, on shutting, it, remaining stuck
inside the passenger compartment.
Device deactivation
The system is disabled automatically on every door
in the following cases:
❒ if the mechanical key is turned to the opening
position in the driver's door;
❒ by unlocking the doors using the remote control;
❒ by turning the ignition key to the MAR-ON
position.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
WARNING
Before leaving the vehicle parked with
sliding doors open, always check that
the latch is engaged.
WARNING
Do not move the vehicle with side doors
open.
To open the sliding side door, lift handle A fig. 117
and slide the door open.
The sliding side door is equipped with a stop that
prevents it sliding beyond the end of its travel when
opening.
To close, operate the exterior handle A (or the
corresponding interior handle) and push to close.
In any case, make sure that the door is correctly
hooked to the device which keeps the door fully
open.
SLIDING SIDE WINDOW
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To open, keep the two handles B fig. 118 pressed
toward one another and slide the window.
When the two handles are released, the sliding glass
may stop in intermediate positions.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 117
F0N0061
fig. 118
F0N0240
101
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
MOVING FOOTBOARD
(for versions/markets, where provided)
REAR DOOR WITH TWO WINGS
When the side door of the passenger compartment
or luggage compartment is opened, a footboard
fig. 119 emerges from the lower part of the floorpan
to make it easier to get on board the vehicle.
Manual opening of the first swing door from
the outside
Turn the key anticlockwise fig. 114 or press the
button on the remote control and turn handle A
fig. 120 in the direction of the arrow.
WARNING
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Before setting off after parking or
before moving the vehicle in any way,
ensure that the footboard is fully stowed away.
As the movement of the platform is linked to
that of the sliding side door, the warning light
in the instrument panel comes on if it is not
fully retracted in the same way as when the
rear doors are not shut.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
102
fig. 119
F0N0176
fig. 120
F0N0129
Manual opening of the first swing door from
the inside
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Pull handle B fig. 121 in the direction of the arrow.
Electrical closure from inside
Close the two rear swing doors (first the left, then
the right) and press button D fig. 123 located on the
window control panel.
Manual closure of the first swing door from
the outside
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Turn the key clockwise or press the button on the
key with remote control. Close the left door first,
followed by the right door.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Manual opening of the second swing door
Pull handle C fig. 122 in the direction of the arrow.
The rear swing doors are equipped with a spring
loaded system that stops them at an angle of about
90 degrees during opening.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
fig. 122
F0N0131
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 121
F0N0130
fig. 123
F0N0132
103
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
The opening angle of the two doors may be
increased for more convenient loading and unloading.
To carry out this operation, press button A fig. 124;
the doors can then be opened by about 180 degrees.
WARNING
This spring loaded system has activation
forces that were designed for optimum
comfort. Accidental knocks or a strong gust of
wind may release the springs and close the
doors spontaneously.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
WARNING
With the doors opened to 180 degrees,
no locking system is effective. Do not
use this opening with the vehicle parked on a
gradient or when it is windy.
ELECTRIC WINDOWS
ELECTRIC
Switches fig. 125 on the inner armrest of the driver's
door control the following with the ignition key in
MAR-ON position:
A: to open/close the left front window;
B: right front window opening/closing.
Continuous automatic operation
All versions are equipped with automatic raising and
lowering of the front, driver's side window.
Keep one of the buttons held down for longer than
half a second to activate automatic continuous
window operation. The window will stop when it is
fully opened or closed, or when the button is
pressed again.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
104
fig. 124
F0N0188
fig. 125
F0N0062
IMPORTANT With the ignition key in the STOP
position or extracted, the electric windows remain
activated for about 3 minutes and are deactivated
immediately when one of the doors is opened.
WARNING
Improper use of the electric windows
can be dangerous. Before and during
operation, always check that no-one is exposed
to the risk of being injured either directly by
the moving window or through objects getting
caught or by being hit.When leaving the vehicle,
always remove the key from the ignition to
avoid the risk of injury to anyone remaining in
the car due to accidental operation of the
electric windows.
BONNET
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
OPENING
Proceed as follows:
❒ open the driver's door to gain access to the
bonnet release;
❒ pull the lever fig. 126 in the direction indicated by
the arrow;
❒ pull lever A fig. 127 as shown in the figure;
❒ lift the bonnet and, at the same time, release the
bonnet stay fig. 128 from its locking device D,
then insert the end fig. 129 of the bonnet stay into
the housing E.
IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet, check that
the windscreen wiper arms are not lifted from the
windscreen.
Front passenger side door
A dedicated switch for operating the window is
located on the inner armrest of the passenger side
front door.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 126
F0N0063
105
CLOSING
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Proceed as follows:
❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand and with the
other remove the stay C fig. 129 from the housing
E and fit it back in its locking device D fig. 128;
❒ lower the bonnet to approximately 20 centimetres
from the engine compartment and let it drop.
Make sure that the bonnet is completely closed
and not only fastened by the safety catch by trying
to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do not try
to press the bonnet lid down but open it and
repeat the procedure.
IMPORTANT Always check that the bonnet is closed
correctly to avoid it opening while the car is
travelling.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 128
F0N0065
fig. 129
F0N0066
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
106
fig. 127
F0N0323
WARNING
The bonnet must always be perfectly
closed while travelling for safety reasons.
Therefore, always check that the hood has been
correctly closed and that the lock has been
engaged. If you notice when driving that the
hood has not been properly locked, stop
immediately and close the hood correctly.
WARNING
The bonnet may drop suddenly if the
supporting rod is not positioned
correctly.
WARNING
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK
To fit the roof/ski rack, with provision for versions
H1 and H2, use the pins A provided on the edges of
the roof fig. 130.
Long wheelbase vehicles are equipped with 8 pins;
short or medium wheelbase vehicles are equipped
with 6 pins; vehicles with extra-long wheelbases are
equipped with 10 pins.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Check that the attachment fixing screws
are tight after a few kilometres.
Fully comply with the regulations in force
concerning maximum clearance.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
Perform these operations only when the
vehicle is stationary.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 130
F0N0138
107
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
IMPORTANT Follow the instructions contained in
the assembly kit carefully. Assembly must be
performed by qualified personnel.
WARNING
SAFETY
Evenly distribute the load and take into
account, when driving, the increased
responsiveness of the vehicle to side wind.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
HEADLIGHTS
LIGHT BEAM DIRECTION
The correct direction of the headlights is essential
for the comfort and safety of the driver and other
road users. To ensure the best visibility when
travelling with the headlights on, the headlight
alignment must be correct. Contact a Fiat Dealership
to have the headlights checked and adjusted.
HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT CORRECTOR
Never exceed the maximum permitted
loads (see chapter "Technical
specifications").
This device works with the ignition key in the
MAR-ON position and the dipped headlights on.
The vehicle tilts backwards when it is laden, raising
the beam.
The beams must therefore be realigned in this case.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
108
fig. 131
F0N0516
Headlight alignment adjustment
ABS SYSTEM
Press
or on the control panel fig. 131.
The instrument panel display shows the position in
relation to the adjustment set.
If you have never driven a vehicle with ABS before, it
is advisable to perform a few tests on slippery
surface, always in safe conditions and fully complying
with the Highway Code of the country where you
are driving. Read the following information carefully.
IMPORTANT Check the alignment of the light beams
each time the weight of the load transported
changes.
FOG LIGHT ALIGNMENT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the headlights
checked and adjusted.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTS WHEN
ABROAD
The dipped headlights are directed for operation in
the country where the vehicle was originally
purchased. When in countries where you drive on
the other side of the road, you need to alter the
beam direction by affixing a specially designed
self-adhesive film in order not to dazzle the vehicles
travelling in the opposite direction. Such film is
provided by Lineaccessori Fiat and is available at Fiat
Dealerships.
This is an integral part of the braking system, which
prevents one or more wheels from locking or
slipping regardless of the road surface conditions and
braking intensity, ensuring control of the vehicle
even during emergency braking.
The EBD system (Electronic Braking Force
Distribution) completes the system allowing the
brake force to be distributed between the front and
rear wheels.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IMPORTANT To obtain the maximum efficiency of
the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 500
km is needed: during this period it is better to
avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SYSTEM INTERVENTION
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
The driver can feel that the ABS system has come
into action because the brake pedal pulsates slightly
and the system gets noisier: it means that the car
speed should be altered to suit the type of road
surface.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
109
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
MECHANICAL BRAKE ASSIST (emergency
braking assistance)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This system (which cannot be deactivated)
recognises emergency braking conditions according
to the speed of operation of the brake pedal and
provides an additional hydraulic braking pressure to
support that provided by the driver. This allows
faster and more powerful operation of the braking
system.
IMPORTANT When the Mechanical Brake Assist is
activated, noises may be heard from the system. This
is normal. Anyway, while braking keep the brake
pedal depressed.
WARNING
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
110
When the ABS cuts in and you feel the
brake pedal pulsating, do not raise
your foot, but keep it pressed; in doing so you
will stop in the shortest amount of space
possible depending on the current road
conditions.
WARNING
If the ABS system is activated, this
indicates that the traction of the tires
on the road is nearing its limit.You must slow
down to a speed compatible with the available
wheel traction.
WARNING
The ABS gets the most from the
available grip, but it cannot improve it;
you should therefore take every care when
driving on slippery surfaces and not take
unnecessary risks.
FAULT INDICATIONS
ABS failure
This is indicated by the
warning light on the
instrument panel switching on together with the
dedicated message on the display (for versions/
markets, where provided) (see “Warning lights and
messages” section).
In the case, the braking system will work as normal
without the extra capacity offered by the ABS
system. Drive carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership
to have the system checked.
EBD failure
This is indicated by the
and
warning lights on
the instrument panel switching on together with
the dedicated message on the display (for
versions/markets, where provided) (see “Warning
lights and messages” section).
In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and
the vehicle may swerve when braking sharply. Drive
carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have
the system checked.
WARNING
If only the
warning light switches on
on the instrument panel (with a message
on the multifunction display on some versions),
stop the car immediately and contact the
nearest Fiat Dealership. Fluid leaking from the
hydraulic system will compromise the operation
of the braking system, whether it is of the
conventional type or with ABS.
ESP SYSTEM (Electronic Stability
Program)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This is an electronic system that controls vehicle
stability in the event of tyre grip loss, helping to
maintain directional control.
The ESP system is therefore particularly useful when
the grip conditions of road surfaces change.
The MSR system (adjustment of the engine braking
torque during gear changes) and the HBA system
(automatic increase in the braking pressure during
emergency braking) are present with ESP, ASR and
Hill Holder systems (for versions/markets where
provided).
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
SYSTEM INTERVENTION
This is indicated by the flashing of the warning
light on the instrument panel, to inform the driver
that the car is in critical stability and grip conditions.
IN AN EMERGENCY
System activation
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
The ESP system is automatically activated when the
vehicle is started and cannot be deactivated.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
111
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
112
Fault indications
HILL HOLDER SYSTEM
In the event of a fault, the ESP system will be
automatically switched off and the warning light
will switch on constantly in the instrument panel
along with a message in the multifunction display (for
versions/markets where provided) (see “Warning
lights and messages” section). The LED in the ASR
button will switch on. Contact a Fiat Dealership
as soon as possible.
It is integral to the ESP system. It automatically
activates with the following conditions:
❒ uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient
higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and
gearbox in neutral or gear (other than reverse)
engaged;
❒ downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with a
gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake
pressed and reverse gear engaged.
When setting off, the ESP system control unit will
maintain braking pressure on the wheels until the
torque required for starting is attained or, in any
case, for a maximum of 2 seconds in order that the
right foot can be moved easily from the brake pedal
to the accelerator pedal.
When 2 seconds have elapsed, without any
departure having taken place, the system is
automatically deactivated, gradually releasing the
braking pressure. During this release stage, the
typical brake disengagement noise indicating that the
vehicle is going to move imminently will be heard.
WARNING
ESP performance features must not
induce the driver to take unnecessary or
unfounded risks. Driving style must always be
adapted to road conditions, visibility and
traffic.The driver is always responsible for road
safety.
Fault indications
ASR SYSTEM (Antislip Regulation)
The warning light will switch on in the event of a
fault (see “Warning lights and messages”).
This is a traction control system that cuts in
automatically every time one or both drive wheels
slip.
Depending on the slipping conditions, two different
control systems are activated:
❒ if the slipping involves both drive wheels, the ASR
intervenes reducing the power transmitted by the
engine;
❒ if the slipping only involves one of the drive
wheels, it intervenes automatically braking the
wheel that is slipping.
The action of the ASR system is especially useful in
the following conditions:
❒ slipping of the inner wheel on bends due to
dynamic variations in the load or excessive
acceleration;
❒ excessive power transmitted to the wheels, also in
relation to road surface conditions;
❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy road
surfaces;
❒ loss of grip on wet road surfaces (aquaplaning).
IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system is not a parking
brake, therefore do not leave the vehicle without
activating the handbrake, switching off the engine and
engaging first gear.
WARNING
For the correct operation of the ESP and
ASR systems, the tyres must be the
same make and type on all wheels, in perfect
condition and, above all, of the type, make and
size specified.
WARNING
For the correct operation of the ESP and
ASR systems, the tyres must be the
same make and type on all wheels, in perfect
condition and, above all, of the type, make and
size specified.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
113
MSR system (engine drive regulation)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
This is an integral part of the ASR system that, in the
event of a sudden gear down shift, cuts in and
provides torque to the engine thus preventing
excessive drive wheel drive which, especially in poor
grip conditions, can lead to a loss of stability.
WARNING
Do not take unnecessary risks, even if
your vehicle is fitted with this system.
Your driving style must always be suited to the
road conditions, visibility and traffic.The driver
is always responsible for road safety.
Activation/deactivation of the ASR system
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
The ASR system activates automatically each time
the engine is started.
When travelling, the ASR can be switched off and on
again pressing button A fig. 132 located among the
controls in the instrument panel.
Switching off is shown by the LED in the switch itself
switching on together with a message shown in the
multifunction display, for versions/markets where
provided.
If the ASR is switched off when driving, it is
automatically switched on again when the vehicle is
started up.
When travelling on snowy roads with snow chains, it
may be helpful to turn the ASR off: in fact, in these
conditions, slipping of the drive wheels when moving
off makes it possible to obtain better traction.
FAULT INDICATIONS
In the event of a fault, the ASR system will be
automatically switched off and the warning light in
the instrument panel will switch on constantly along
with a message in the multifunction display (for
versions/markets, where provided) (see “Warning
lights and messages” section). The LED in the ASR
button will light up. In this case, contact a Fiat
Dealership as soon as possible.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
114
fig. 132
F0N0077
TRACTION PLUS SYSTEM
Traction Plus operation
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The system is deactivated when starting. To activate
the Traction Plus system, press the T+ button
fig. 133: the LED on the button switches on.
The activation of the Traction Plus system involves
the following functions being switched on:
❒ inhibition of the ASR function, to exploit the
engine torque fully;
❒ a differential locking effect on the front axle,
through the braking system, to improve traction
on irregular surfaces.
If the Traction Plus system is faulty, the warning
light on the instrument panel switches on constantly.
Traction Plus is a driving aid, useful for setting off in
poor grip conditions (snow, ice, mud, etc.) which
allows the drive force to be evenly distributed over
the same axle when both wheels are slipping.
Traction Plus acts by braking the wheels with poor
grip (or those slipping more than the others),
thereby transferring the drive force to those which
have greater grip on the ground.
This function can be activated manually by pressing
the T+ button on the dashboard fig. 133 and
operates under 30 km/h. Over this speed, it is
automatically deactivated (the LED on the button is
still on) and it is reactivated again when the speed
is below 30 km/h.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 133
F0N0509
115
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
116
EOBD SYSTEM
The EOBD system (European On Board Diagnosis)
allows continuous diagnosis of emission-related
components on the vehicle.
It also alerts the driver, by turning on the
warning
light in the instrument panel (together with relevant
message in the multifunction display, for versions/
markets where provided) (see “Warning lights and
messages” section), when these components are no
longer in peak condition.
The aim of the system is to:
❒ monitor system efficiency;
❒ indicate an increase in emissions due to vehicle
malfunction;
❒ indicate the need to replace components which
have deteriorated.
The system also has a diagnosis connector that can
be interfaced with suitable instruments, to read
the error codes stored in the control unit together
with a series of specific parameters for engine
operation and diagnosis.
This check can also be carried out by traffic control
authorities.
IMPORTANT After eliminating the failure, to check
the system completely, Fiat Dealerships run a bench
test and, if necessary, road tests which may also
call for a long journey.
WARNING
If, when the ignition key is turned to the
MAR-ON position, the warning light
either does not come on or, when driving, it
comes on permanently or flashes (along with
a message in the multifunction display for
versions/markets, where provided), contact a
Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Operation
of the indicator
may be verified by traffic
control officers using the appropriate
equipment. Comply with the laws and
regulations of the country where you are
driving.
PARKING SENSORS
The parking sensors are located in the rear bumper
fig. 134 and their function is to inform the driver,
through an intermittent buzzer, about the presence
of obstacles behind the vehicle.
ACTIVATION
The sensors are automatically activated when reverse
gear is engaged.
As the obstacle behind the vehicle gets closer to the
bumper, the buzzer becomes more frequent.
WARNING BUZZER
When reverse gear is engaged an intermittent
acoustic signal is automatically activated.
The acoustic signal:
❒ increases as the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle decreases;
❒ becomes continuous when the distance between
the vehicle and the obstacle is less than 30 cm
and stops immediately if the distance increases;
❒ remains constant if the distance remains
unchanged; if this situation concerns the side
sensors, the buzzer will stop after about 3 seconds
to avoid, for example, warning indications in the
event of manoeuvres along walls.
Detection distances
Central operating range: 140 cm ±10 cm
Side operating range: 60 cm ±20 cm
If several obstacles are detected by the sensors, only
the nearest one is considered.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
FAULT INDICATIONS
IN AN EMERGENCY
Any parking sensor faults will be indicated when
reverse is engaged by the
warning light in the
instrument panel switching on together with the
message in the multifunction display, for
versions/markets, where provided (see chapter
"Warning lights and messages”).
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 134
F0N0119
117
OPERATION WITH TRAILER
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
118
Parking sensor operation is automatically disabled
when the electric cable plug of the trailer is fitted
into the vehicle tow hook socket.
The sensors are automatically enabled again when
the trailer's cable plug is removed.
IMPORTANT If you wish to leave the tow hook
fitted without towing a trailer, it is advisable to
contact a Fiat Dealership for the relevant system
update operations because the tow hook could be
detected as an obstacle by the central sensors.
In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the
vapour jet/high pressure washing nozzles at 10 cm
at least from the sensors.
For correct operation, sensors must always
be clean from mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be
careful not to scratch or damage the
sensors while cleaning them. Avoid using dry,
rough or hard cloths.The sensors should be
washed using clean water with the addition of car
shampoo if necessary.
WARNING
Parking manoeuvres however are always
the driver’s responsibility.When making
these manoeuvres, always make sure that no
people (especially children) or animals are
present in your manoeuvering space.The
parking sensors serve to assist the driver, but
must never allow his attention to lapse during
potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even those
executed at low speeds.
GENERAL WARNINGS
❒ When parking, take the utmost care over
obstacles that may be above or under the sensors.
❒ Objects close to the vehicle, in certain
circumstances are not detected and could
therefore cause damage to the vehicle or be
damaged.
The following conditions may influence the
performance of the parking sensor system:
❒ Reduced sensor sensitivity and a reduction in the
parking assistance system performance could be
due to the presence on the surface of the sensor
of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint.
❒ The sensor may detect a non-existent obstacle
(echo noise) due to mechanical noises, for
example when washing the vehicle, in case of rain,
strong wind, hail.
❒ The signals sent by the sensors can also be altered
by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g.
pneumatic brake systems or pneumatic drills) near
the vehicle.
❒ The performance of the parking assistance system
may also be affected by the position of the
sensors. For example by a change in the ride
setting (caused by the wear of the shock
absorbers, suspension), changing the tyres,
overloading the vehicle and carrying out specific
tuning operations that require the vehicle to
be lowered.
❒ Detection of obstacles in the upper part of the
vehicle (particularly in the case of vans or chassis
cabs) may not be guaranteed because the system
detects obstacles that could strike the lower
part of the vehicle.
START&STOP SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The Start&Stop device automatically stops the engine
each time the vehicle is stationary and starts it
again when the driver wants to move off. This
improves the efficiency of the vehicle by reducing fuel
consumption, the emission of harmful gases and
noise pollution.
OPERATING MODES
Stopping the engine
WITH MANUAL GEARBOX
With the vehicle stationary, the engine stops with
the gearbox in neutral and the clutch pedal released.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Note The engine can only be stopped automatically
after exceeding a speed of about 10 km/h, to prevent
the engine from being repeatedly stopped when
driving at walking pace.
The engine being stopped is signalled by the fig. 135
icon on the display, depending on the trim level.
IN AN EMERGENCY
Restarting the engine
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
WITH MANUAL GEARBOX
Depress the clutch pedal to restart the engine.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
INDEX
119
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
MANUAL ACTIVATION AND
DEACTIVATION OF THE SYSTEM
ENGINE STOPPING FAILURE CONDITIONS
To activate/deactivate the system manually, press the
fig. 136 button on the dashboard control trim.
Start&Stop system activation
A message will appear on the display when the
Start&Stop system is activated. In this condition, the
LED on the button is off.
Start&Stop system deactivation
Start&Stop system deactivation is signalled by a
message on the display.
The LED above the button is on when the system
is deactivated.
With the device activated, for reasons of comfort,
limiting emissions and safety, the power unit does
not stop in certain conditions, including:
❒ engine still cold;
❒ particularly cold external temperatures, if the
corresponding indication is provided;
❒ battery not sufficiently charged;
❒ particulate filter regeneration in progress (diesel
engines only);
❒ driver's door not shut;
❒ driver's seat belt not fastened;
❒ reverse gear engaged (for example, for parking
manoeuvres);
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
120
fig. 135
F0N0540
fig. 136
F0N0541
❒ automatic climate control, if a suitable thermal
comfort level has not yet been reached or to
enable MAX-DEF function.
❒ during the first period of use, to initialise the
system
RESTARTING CONDITIONS
For reasons of comfort, limiting pollutant emissions
and safety purposes, the power unit can restart
automatically without any action on behalf of the
driver if certain conditions are met, including:
❒ battery not sufficiently charged;
❒ reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. if the brake
pedal is pressed repeatedly);
❒ vehicle in motion (e.g. when driving on roads with
a gradient);
❒ stopping the engine through the Start&Stop
system for more than about three minutes.
❒ automatic climate control system for adjusting the
thermal comfort level or to enable MAX-DEF
function.
With a gear engaged, the engine can be automatically
restarted only by fully depressing the clutch pedal.
Note If the clutch is not pressed, when three
minutes have elapsed since the engine was stopped,
the engine can only be restarted using the key.
Note In cases when the engine stops and this is not
desired, due for example to the clutch pedal being
released sharply with a gear engaged, if the
Start&Stop system is active, the engine can be
restarted by fully depressing the clutch pedal or by
placing the gear lever in neutral.
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
When the engine is stopped by the Start&Stop
system, if the driver unfastens their seat belt and
opens the driver's door or the passenger door, the
engine can only be restarted using the key. The
driver is notified of this condition by a buzzer,
through the fig. 135 warning light flashing in the
instrument panel and, where provided, by a message
in the display.
"ENERGY SAVING" FUNCTION
(for versions/markets, where provided)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
If, as a result of automatic engine restarting, the
driver does not carry out any action on the vehicle
for an extended period (about 3 minutes), the
Start&Stop system stops the engine definitively, to
prevent fuel consumption. The engine can only
be started using the key in such cases.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Note In any case, it is possible to keep the engine
running by deactivating the Start&Stop system.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
121
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
IRREGULAR OPERATION
JUMP STARTING
In the event of malfunction, the Start&Stop system is
deactivated. The driver is informed about the fault
warning light
through the switching on of the
together with a message on the display. In this case,
contact a Fiat Dealership.
In the event of jump starting fig. 138 with a booster
battery, never connect the negative lead ( - ) of
the booster battery to the negative pole C of the
vehicle's battery, but rather to an engine/gearbox
earth point (follow the lead connection procedure
described in the "Jump starting" paragraph in the
chapter "In an emergency").
VEHICLE INACTIVITY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
In the event of vehicle inactivity, special attention
must be paid to the disconnection of the battery
power supply. Proceed as follows: detach connector
A fig. 137 (by pressing button B) from sensor C
for monitoring the status of the battery installed on
the negative battery pole D. This sensor must never
be disconnected from the pole except if the battery
is replaced.
IMPORTANT After turning the ignition key to STOP,
wait at least 1 minute before disconnecting the
electrical supply to the battery.
IMPORTANT
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet, make sure
that the vehicle is switched off and
the key is in the OFF position. Follow the
instructions on the label on the front
crossmember. It is advisable to extract the key
when there are other people in the vehicle.
WARNING
If the battery needs to be replaced,
always contact a Fiat Dealership.The
replacement battery should be of the same type
(L6 105Ah/850A) and should have the same
characteristics.
INDEX
122
fig. 137
F0N0543
RADIO
WARNING
The vehicle should always be evacuated
after the key has been removed or
turned to the OFF position.When refuelling,
make sure that the car is switched off with the
key in the OFF position.
WARNING
If climate comfort is to be favoured, the
Start&Stop system can be disabled,
for a continuous operation of the climate
control system.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
For radio operation, consult the Supplement
attached to this Owner Handbook.
SETUP
(for versions/markets, where provided)
SAFETY
The system consists of:
❒ radio supply leads;
❒ front speaker connection cables;
❒ aerial supply lead;
❒ 2 tweeters A located in the front doors (30 W
max power each) fig. 139;
❒ 2 mid-woofers B located in the front doors (165
mm diameter, 40 W max power each) fig. 140;
❒ radio aerial lead.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 138
F0N0544
fig. 139
F0N0157
123
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
The radio must be installed in the place occupied by
the central storage compartment because this makes
the cables provided accessible.
WARNING
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
For connection to the existing devices
supplied in the vehicle contact Fiat
Dealership to prevent any problem that could
impair vehicle safety.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
If after buying the car, you decide to install electrical
accessories that require a permanent electric supply
(alarm, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories
that in any case burden the electric supply, contact
a Fiat Dealership, whose qualified personnel, besides
suggesting the most suitable devices from
Lineaccessori Fiat, will also evaluate the overall
electric consumption, checking whether the car's
electrical system is able to withstand the load
required, or whether it needs to be integrated with a
more powerful battery.
WARNING
Take care when fitting additional
spoilers, alloy wheels or non-standard
wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of
the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp,
repeated braking or on long descents. Make
sure that nothing obstructs the pedal stroke
(mats, etc.)
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
124
ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE
OWNER
fig. 140
F0N0158
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
DEVICES
RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE
PHONES
Electrical and electronic devices installed after buying
the car in the context of after-sales service must
carry this label: fig. 141
Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorises the installation of
transceivers provided that installation is carried out
at a specialised centre, in a workmanlike fashion
and in compliance with manufacturer's specifications.
Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones,
CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside
the car unless a separate aerial is mounted externally.
IMPORTANT Traffic police may not allow the car
on the road if devices have been installed which
modify the features of the car. This may also cause
invalidation of warranty in relation to faults caused
by the change either directly or indirectly related
to it.
Fiat Auto S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage caused
by the installation of accessories either not supplied
or recommended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. or not installed
in compliance with the instructions provided.
IMPORTANT The use of these devices inside the
passenger compartment (without an external aerial)
may cause the electrical systems to malfunction.
This could compromise the safety of the car in
addition to constituting a potential hazard for
passengers' health.
In addition, transmission and reception of these
devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the
car body.
As far as the use of EC-approved mobile phones is
concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS), follow the usage
instructions provided by the mobile phone
manufacturer.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 141
125
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
PROVISION FOR FITTING TELEPASS ON
REFLECTIVE WINDSCREEN
(for versions/markets, where provided)
REFUELLING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with a reflective
windscreen, install the Telepass in the appropriate
area shown in fig. 142 - fig. 143.
If the outside temperature is very low, diesel fluidity
may become insufficient due to the formation of
paraffin clots with consequent defective operation of
the fuel supply system.
In order to avoid these problems, different types of
diesel fuel are distributed according to the season:
summer type, winter type and arctic type
(cold/mountain areas). If refuelling with diesel fuel
whose specifications are not suitable for the current
temperature, it is advisable to mix TUTELA DIESEL
ART additive in the proportions shown on the
container with the fuel. Pour the additive into the
tank before the diesel fuel.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
OPERATION AT LOW TEMPERATURES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
126
fig. 142
F0N0245
fig. 143
F0N0246
When using or parking the vehicle for a long time in
the mountains or cold areas, it is advisable to refuel
using locally available diesel fuel.
In this case, it is also advisable to keep the tank over
50% full.
Only refuel with automotive diesel
complying with the European
specification EN 590.The use of other
products or mixtures may damage the engine
beyond repair and consequently invalidate the
warranty, due to the damage caused. If you
accidentally introduce other types of fuel into the
tank, do not start the engine. Empty the tank. If
the engine has been run for even an extremely
limited amount of time, you must not only drain
the fuel tank, but the rest of the supply circuit
as well.
FUEL TANK CAP
To carry out fuelling, open flap A fig. 144 and
unscrew cap B; the cap is fitted with a safety device
C which fastens it to the flap so it cannot be mislaid.
The sealing may cause a slight pressure increase in
the tank. A little breathing off, while slackening
the cap is absolutely normal.
When refuelling, fasten the cap to the device inside
the flap as shown in fig. 144.
WARNING
Do not bring naked flames or lit
cigarettes near to the fuel tank opening:
fire risk. Keep your face away from the fuel
filler to prevent breathing in harmful vapours.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
REFUELLING CAPACITY
To fill the tank completely, top up twice after the
pump switches off. Further top-ups could cause
faults in the fuel feeding system.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 144
F0N0068
127
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
128
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
The following devices are used for reducing diesel
fuel engine emissions:
❒ oxidising catalytic converter;
❒ exhaust gas recirculation system (EGR);
❒ particulate filter (DPF) (for versions/markets,
where provided).
The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechanical filter,
integral with the exhaust system, that physically traps
particulates present in the exhaust gases of Diesel
engines.
The diesel particulate filter has been adopted to
eliminate almost all particulates in compliance with
current / future legal regulations.
During normal use of the vehicle, the engine
management control unit records a set of data
(travel time, type of route, temperatures, etc.) and it
will then calculate how much particulate has been
trapped by the filter.
Since this filter physically traps particulate, it should
be regenerated (cleaned) at regular intervals by
burning the carbon particles.
The regeneration procedure is controlled
automatically by the engine management control unit
according to the filter conditions and vehicle use
conditions.
There may be a limited increase in the engine idle
speed during the regeneration, a limited increase in
fumes and high temperatures at the exhaust.
These are not faults; they do not impair vehicle
performance or damage the environment. If
the dedicated message is displayed, refer to
paragraph "Warning lights and messages".
WARNING
The diesel particulate filter (DPF)
reaches high temperatures during
operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry
leaves, pine needles or other flammable
material: fire hazard.
SAFETY
SEAT BELTS
USING THE SEAT BELTS
The belt should be worn keeping the torso straight
and rested against the backrest.
To fasten the seat belts, grip the tongue A fig. 145
and insert it into the buckle B, until the locking click
is heard.
On removal, if it jams, let it rewind for a short
stretch, then pull it out again without jerking.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button C. Guide the
seat belt with your hand while it is rewinding, to
prevent it from twisting.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Through the reel, the belt automatically adapts to
the body of the passenger wearing it, allowing
freedom of movement.
The reel may lock up when the vehicle is parked on a
steep slope: this is perfectly normal.
Furthermore, the reel mechanism locks the belt if it
is pulled sharply or in the event of sudden braking,
collisions and high-speed bends.
WARNING
Never press button C fig. 145 when
travelling.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 145
F0N0069
129
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
The height of the seat belts must be
adjusted with the vehicle at a standstill.
Seat belt with reel for front central place on
bench seat
The two-seater front bench is equipped with an
on-board seat belt (reel on seat) with three
anchorage points for the central position fig. 147.
To adjust, use button A fig. 146 and raise or lower
handle B.
Always adjust the seat belt height to the passenger's
body: This precaution may considerably reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
Correct adjustment is obtained when the belt passes
approximately half way between the shoulder and
the neck.
WARNING
After adjustment, always check that the
cursor to which the ring is fastened is
locked in one of the set positions. Release the
grip and push downwards to enable the locking
device to click if the grip has not been released
in one of the possible positions.
fig. 146
F0N0070
fig. 147
F0N0156
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
130
SBR SYSTEM
PRETENSIONERS
The vehicle is fitted with a Seat Belt Reminder
system (SBR), consisting of a buzzer and the flashing
warning light on the instrument panel which
warns the driver that the seat belt must be fastened.
The buzzer can be deactivated (until the next time
the engine stops) as follows:
❒ fasten the driver's seat belt;
❒ turn the ignition key to the MAR-ON position;
❒ wait for over 20 seconds and then release one of
the seat belts.
For permanent deactivation, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
With a digital display, the SBR system can be
reactivated only at a Fiat Dealership.
With a multifunction display, the SBR system can also
be re-enabled through the setup menu.
To increase the protective efficiency of the front seat
belts, the vehicle is fitted with pretensioners. These
devices, in the event of a violent head-on crash or
side impact, rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.
In this way, they ensure that the belts fit tightly to
the wearer before the restraining action begins.
The seat belt locks to indicate that the device has
intervened; the seat belt cannot be drawn back
up even when guiding it manually.
IMPORTANT To obtain the highest degree of
protection from the action of the pretensioning
device, wear the seat belt tight to the chest and
pelvis.
A slight discharge of smoke may be produced during
the activation of the pretensioner which is not in
harmful and does not involve any fire hazard.
The pretensioner does not require any maintenance
or lubrication. Any changes to their original
conditions will invalidate their efficiency. If, due to
unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the
device has been affected by water and mud, it must
absolutely be replaced.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
131
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
WARNING
The pretensioner may be used only
once. After it is triggered, have it
replaced at a Fiat Dealership. Consult the data
plate in the glove box to check the status of
the pretensioners. Go to a Fiat Dealership
to have the device replaced when the
expiration date approaches.
Operations which lead to knocks,
vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C
for a maximum of 6 hours) in the area
around the pretensioners may cause damage or
trigger them.These devices are not affected by
vibrations caused by irregularities of the road
surface or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc.
Contact a Fiat Dealership for any assistance.
LOAD LIMITERS
To increase passenger safety, the front seat belt reels
contain a load limiter which controls the force
acting on the chest and shoulders during the belt
restraining action in the event of a head-on collision.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING
THE SEAT BELTS
The driver is responsible for respecting (and ensuring
that all the other passengers also respect) the local
laws in force regarding the use of seat belts. Always
fasten the seat belts before starting.
Seat belts must also be worn by expectant mothers:
the risk of injury in the event of an accident is greatly
reduced for them and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt. Pregnant women must position
the lower part of the belt very low down so that
it passes over the pelvis and under the abdomen (see
fig. 148).
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
132
fig. 148
F0N0120
WARNING
WARNING
The belt must not be twisted.The upper
part must pass over the shoulder and
cross the chest diagonally.The lower part must
adhere to the pelvis (as shown in fig. 149)
rather than the abdomen of the passenger.
Never use devices (clips, pegs, etc.) to hold the
seat belt away from your body.
For maximum safety, keep the back of
your seat upright, lean back into it
and make sure the seat belt fits closely across
your chest and pelvis. Always fasten the seat
belts on both the front and the rear seats!
Travelling without wearing seat belts will
increase the risk of serious injury and even
death in the event of an accident.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Removing or otherwise tampering with
safety belt and pretensioner components
is strictly prohibited. Any operations on these
components must be performed by qualified
and authorised technicians. Always go to a Fiat
Dealership.
WARNING
If the belt has been sharply pulled, for
example as the result of an accident, the
safety belt, together with the anchoring devices,
the anchoring device mounting screws and the
pretensioner must be completely replaced. Even
if the belt does not present any exterior signs
of wear or damage, it may have lost its
restraining properties.
fig. 149
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
F0N0121
133
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SEAT BELTS MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Each seat belt must be used by only one
person. Never travel with a child sitting
on the passenger's lap and a single belt to
protect them both fig. 150. In general, do not
place any objects between the person and belt.
WARNING
If the belt has been sharply pulled, for
example as the result of an accident, the
safety belt, together with the anchoring devices,
the anchoring device mounting screws and the
pretensioner must be completely replaced. Even
if the belt does not present any exterior signs
of wear or damage, it may have lost its
restraining properties.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
134
fig. 150
F0N0122
To maintain the seat belts in efficient conditions,
observe the following:
❒ always use the belt with the strap well stretched
and never twisted; make sure that it is free to
run without obstructions;
❒ replace the belt after an accident of a certain
severity even if it does not appear to be damaged.
Always replace the belt if the pretensioners were
deployed;
❒ to clean the belt, wash by hand with water and
neutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in the shade.
Never use strong detergents, bleach, paints or any
other substance which could damage the belt
fibres;
❒ prevent the reels from getting wet: their correct
operation is only guaranteed if water does not
get inside;
❒ replace the seat belt when it shows wear or cuts.
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY
For optimal protection in the event of a collision, all
passengers must be seated and wearing adequate
restraint systems.
This is even more important for children.
This prescription is compulsory in all EC countries
according to EC Directive 2003/20/EC.
A child's head is larger and heavier than an adult's in
proportion to its body, while their muscular and
bone structures are not fully developed. Therefore,
correct restraint systems are necessary which are
different from adult seat belts.
The results of research on the best child restraint
systems are contained in the European Standard
ECE-R44, which enforces the use of restraint
systems classified into five groups:
Group
Weight groups
Group 0
up to 10 kg
Group 0+
up to 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
Group 3
22-36 kg
As you can see, the groups overlap partly and, in fact,
there are devices on sale that cover more than one
weight group.
All restraint devices must bear the type-approval
data along with the control mark on a label firmly
secured to the child seat which must never be
removed.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of view of
restraint systems, children are considered as adults
and wear the seat belts normally.
Lineaccessori Fiat offers child restraint systems for
each weight group. These devices are recommended,
having been specifically designed for Fiat vehicles.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Do not place a cradle seat facing
backwards on the front seat if the
passenger side air bag is on. Deployment
of the air bag in an accident could
cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the
severity of the collision. It is advisable to always
carry children in a child seat on the rear seat,
which is the most protected position in the
event of a collision. If you need to carry a child
on the front passenger seat in a cradle seat
facing backwards, the passenger side air bags
(front and side bags, for versions/markets, where
provided) must be deactivated using the setup
menu. It is important to check the performed
deactivation on the warning light on the
instrument panel.The passenger seat must also
be slid back as far as possible in order to avoid
the child seat from coming into contact with the
dashboard.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
135
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
GROUP 0 and 0+
GROUP 1
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing backwards
on a cradle seat, which, supporting the head, does
not induce stress on the neck in the event of sharp
decelerations.
The cradle is restrained by the vehicle's seat belts, as
shown in fig. 151 and it must restrain the child in
turn with its own belts.
Children from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight can be carried
facing forwards if the child seat is fitted with a front
cushion, through which the vehicle's seat belt
restrains both child and seat fig. 152.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
WARNING
The figures are only examples for fitting
purposes. Install the car seat according
to the instructions, which must be included with
this type of restraint system.
WARNING
The figures are only examples for fitting
purposes. Install the car seat according
to the instructions, which must be included with
this type of restraint system.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
136
fig. 151
F0N0123
fig. 152
F0N0124
WARNING
Car seats for weight groups 0 and 1
feature an attachment in front of the
vehicle safety belts as well as its own belts to
restrain the child. Due to their weight, they may
be dangerous if incorrectly mounted (e.g. if
fastened to the vehicle seat belts placing a
cushion in between). Follow the installation
instructions provided carefully.
GROUP 2
Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the vehicle's seat
belts directly fig. 153.
The child seat is now needed only to position the
child correctly with respect to the belts so that the
diagonal section crosses the child's chest and never
the neck, and the lower part is snug on the pelvis not
the abdomen.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
The figures are only examples for fitting
purposes. Install the car seat according
to the instructions, which must be included with
this type of restraint system.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 153
F0N0125
137
GROUP 3
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
WARNING
For children from 22 to 36 kg the size of the child’s
chest means that a support to space the child’s
back from the backrest is no longer required.
The fig. 154 shows an example of correct child seat
positioning on the rear seat.
Children over 1.50 m in height can wear seat belts
like adults.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
138
fig. 154
F0N0126
The figures are only examples for fitting
purposes. Install the car seat according
to the instructions, which must be included with
this type of restraint system.
SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR THE USE OF CHILD SEATS
The vehicle complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs the arrangement
possibilities for child seats on the seats of a vehicle as shown in the following table (the table refers to the
Van, Combi and Panorama versions):
Group
Weight groups
CAB
1st and 2nd REAR SEATS ROW
SAFETY
Single or twoseater seat (1 or
2 passengers)
Rear left side
passenger
Rear right side
passenger
Central passenger
Up to 13 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 1
9-18 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 2
15-25 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 3
22-36 kg
Group 0, 0+
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
U
U
U
U
U suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified "Groups".
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
139
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
140
Below is a summary of the main safety rules
to be followed when carrying children
❒ The recommended position for installing child
seats is on the rear seat, as it is the most
protected area in the event of a crash.
❒ If the passenger's air bag is deactivated always
check the warning light on the instrument panel
to make sure that it has actually been deactivated.
❒ Carefully follow the instructions supplied with the
child seat which are mandatory by law. Keep the
instructions in the vehicle along with the other
papers and this handbook. Do not use
second-hand child seats without instructions.
❒ Always check that the seat belt is well fastened by
pulling on it.
❒ Only one child is to be strapped into each
retaining system; never carry two children using
one child seat.
❒ Always check that the seat belts do not restrain
the child's throat.
❒ While travelling, do not let the child sit incorrectly
or release the belts.
❒ Never carry children on your lap, even newborns.
No-one can restrain a child in the event of an
accident.
❒ In the event of an accident, replace the child seat
with a new one.
WARNING
Do not place a cradle seat facing
backwards on the front seat if the
passenger side air bag is on. Deployment of the
air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries
to the baby regardless of the severity of the
collision. It is advisable to always carry children
in a child seat on the rear seat, which is the
most protected position in the event of a
collision.
SETUP FOR “UNIVERSAL ISOFIX”
CHILD SEAT
The vehicle can be fitted with a Universal Isofix child
seat, a new European standardised system for
carrying children safely.
An example of a child seat is shown in fig. 155.
Due to its different attachment system, the child seat
must be secured using the special lower metal rings
A fig. 156, positioned between rear backrest and
cushion. The upper belt (provided with the child
seat) must be then secured to ring B fig. 157 located
in the lower part of the seat. It is possible to have
a mixed assembly of traditional child seats and
Universal Isofix seats.
Remember that in case of Universal Isofix child seats,
you can use all seats approved with the marking
ECE R44/03 “Universal Isofix”.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 155
F0N0236
fig. 156
F0N0234
141
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
WARNING
WARNING
Fit the child seat only when the vehicle
is stationary.The child seat is correctly
anchored to the brackets when you hear the
click.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 157
142
F0N0235
Follow the instructions for positioning,
fitting and removing which the child seat
manufacturer must supply together with the
seat.
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE FOR USING UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD SEATS
The table below shows the different installation possibilities for Universal Isofix child seats on the seats fitted
with Isofix attachments, in accordance with European regulation ECE 16.
Weight group
Portable cradle
Group 0 (up to 10
kg)
Group 0+ (up to 13
kg)
Group I (from 9 to
18 kg)
Child seat
position
Isofix size class
Rear side Isofix
position, 1st row
(PANORAMA)
Rear side Isofix
position, 1st row
(COMBI)
Rearward facing
F
X
X
Rearward facing
G
X
X
Rearward facing
E
IL
IL
Rearward facing
E
IL
IL
Rearward facing
D
IL
IL
Rearward facing
C
IL
IL
Rearward facing
D
IL
IL
Rearward facing
C
IL
IL
Forward facing
B
IUF
IUF
Forward facing
B1
IUF
IUF
Forward facing
A
IUF
IUF
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this group of weight and/or size class.
IL: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems of the "Specific for the vehicle", "Restricted", or "Semiuniversal" categories, approved for
this type of vehicle.
IUF: suitable for forward facing Isofix child restraint systems in the Universal category and type-approved for the use in the weight
group.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
143
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
144
FRONT AIR BAGS
The vehicle is provided with front air bags for the
driver and the passenger.
The front driver / passenger air bags have been
designed to protect the occupants in the event of
head-on crashes of medium-high severity, by placing
the cushion between the occupant and the steering
wheel or dashboard.
Therefore non-deployment in other types of impacts
(side impacts, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not
indicate a system malfunction.
An electronic control unit causes the bag to inflate in
the event of a head-on crash.
The bag will inflate instantaneously placing itself
between the front occupants body and the
structures which could cause injury. It will deflate
immediately afterwards.
Driver and passenger front air bags are not a
replacement of but complementary to the belts,
which you are recommended to always wear, as
specified by law in Europe and most non-European
countries.
The volume of the front air bags at maximum
inflation fills most of the space between the steering
wheel and the driver and between the dashboard
and the passenger.
In the event of an impact, those not wearing a seat
belt will move forward and come into contact with
the bag which is still inflating. The protection offered
by the cushion is reduced in such a case.
Front air bags may not activate in the following
situations:
❒ frontal impacts against highly deformable objects
not involving the front surface of the vehicle (e.g.
wing collision against guard rail, etc.);
❒ jamming of the vehicle underneath other vehicles
or protective barriers (e.g. underneath a truck or
a guard rail); in this case, the bags would offer
no additional protection with respect to the seat
belt and their deployment is unnecessary. Lack
of deployment in such cases is consequently not
the sign of a fault.
WARNING
Do not apply stickers or other objects to
the steering wheel, the dashboard in
the passenger side air bag area and the seats.
Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones) on the
passenger side of the dashboard since they
could interfere with correct inflation of the
passenger air bag and also cause serious injury
to the passengers.
The air bags are not deployed in the event of minor
frontal collisions (for which the restraining action
of the seat belts is sufficient). Safety belts must
always be worn. In the event of frontal collisions they
guarantee correct positioning of the passenger.
FRONT DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG
It consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in a
special recess in the centre of the steering wheel
fig. 158.
FRONT PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in
a special recess in the dashboardfig. 159: this bag
has a larger volume than that of the driver.
WARNING
Do not arrange cradle child seats facing
backwards if the passenger's air bag is
on. Deployment of the air bag in an
accident could cause fatal injuries to the
child. Always deactivate the passenger air bag
when placing a child seat on the front seat.The
passenger seat must also be slid back as far
as possible in order to avoid the child seat from
coming into contact with the dashboard.Though
not required by law, we recommend that you
reactivate this air bag as soon as the child
no longer needs to be transported in the
vehicle's front seat.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 158
F0N0324
fig. 159
F0N0072
145
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
146
MANUAL DEACTIVATION OF PASSENGER
SIDE FRONT AIR BAG AND SIDE BAG
(for versions/markets, where provided)
If a child must be carried on the front seat, the front
passenger side air bag and side bag for chest
protection (for versions/markets where provided)
must be deactivated.
The instrument panel warning light will stay on
constantly until the passenger's front air bag and the
Side Bag for chest protection are reactivated (for
versions/markets where provided).
IMPORTANT To manually deactivate the passenger
side front air bag and side bag for chest protection
(for versions/markets where provided), refer to
section "Knowing your car", paragraph “Multifunction
display”.
SIDE BAGS
The vehicle is fitted with front side bags for driver
and passenger (for versions/markets where provided)
for protecting the chest and window bags (for
versions/markets where provided) for protecting
front and rear passengers' heads.
Side bags (for versions/markets where provided)
protect occupants from side impacts of medium-high
severity, by placing the bag between the occupant
and the internal parts of the side structure of the
vehicle. Non-activation of side bags in other types of
collisions (front collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs,
etc...) is not a system malfunction.
An electronic control unit causes the bags to inflate
in the event of a side-on collision. The bags inflate
instantaneously placing themselves between the
occupants' bodies and the structures which could
cause injury. They deflate immediately afterwards.
Side bags (for versions/markets where provided) are
not a replacement of but complementary to the
belts, which you are recommended to always wear,
as specified by law in Europe and most non-European
countries.
FRONT SIDE BAGS FOR CHEST
PROTECTION
(for versions/markets, where provided)
SIDE AIR BAGS FOR HEAD PROTECTION
(WINDOW BAGS)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Housed in the seats' backrests fig. 160, they consist
of an instantly inflating bag designed to protect
the occupants' chest and pelvis zone in the event of a
side impact of medium-high severity.
They consist of two curtain bags, one on the right
and the other on the left side of the vehicle, located
behind the side coverings of the roof and covered
by specific finishing fig. 161.
Window bags are designed to protect the head of
front and rear occupants in the event of side crash,
thanks to the wide bag inflation surface.
IMPORTANT In the event of a side-on crash, the
system offers best protection if you keep a correct
position on the seat because this allows the side bags
to inflate correctly.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 160
F0N0140
fig. 161
F0N0133
147
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
148
IMPORTANT The front air bags and/or side bags may
be deployed if the vehicle is subject to heavy knocks
or accidents involving the underbody area, such as
for example violent shocks, against steps, kerbs
or low obstacles, vehicle falling into big potholes or
depressions in the road.
IMPORTANT A small amount of dust will be released
when the air bags are deployed. The dust is not
harmful and does not indicate the beginning of a fire.
Furthermore, the surface of the deployed bag and
the interior of the vehicle may be covered in a dusty
residue: this may irritate your skin and eyes. Wash
with mild soap and water in the event of exposure.
The expiration dates of the explosive charge and the
clock wire are shown on a label contained in the
glove box. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the
devices replaced when the expiry date approaches.
IMPORTANT Should an accident occur in which any
of the safety devices are activated, take the vehicle to
a Fiat Dealership to have the activated devices
replaced and to have the whole system checked.
Every control, repair and replacement operation
concerning the air bags must only be carried out at a
Fiat Dealership.
If you are having the vehicle scrapped, have the
system deactivated at a Fiat Dealership first. If the
vehicle changes ownership, the new owner must be
informed of how to use the air bags and the above
warnings and also be given this "Owner Handbook".
IMPORTANT Pretensioners, front air bags and front
side bags are deployed differently according to the
type of collision. Failure to deploy of one of the
devices does not necessarily indicate a system
malfunction.
WARNING
Never rest your head, arms or elbows on
the doors, on the windows or in the
window bag area as this could cause injuries
during the inflation phase.
WARNING
Never lean your head, arms or elbows
out of the window.
GENERAL WARNINGS
WARNING
If when turning the key to MAR-ON the
warning light does not turn on or if
it stays on when travelling (together with the
message on the multifunction display, for
versions/markets where provided), there could
be a fault in the safety systems; in this event, air
bags or pretensioners may not trigger in the
case of impact or, in a lower number of cases,
they could be triggered accidentally. Contact
a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the
system checked.
WARNING
Do not cover the backrest of the front or
rear seats with covers which are not
suitable for use with side bags.
WARNING
Always drive with both hands on the
steering wheel so that, if the air bags
must be deployed, they may do so freely. Do not
drive with your body bent forward. Keep your
back straight against the backrest.
WARNING
Air bags may be deployed if another
vehicle crashes into the vehicle if the key
is inserted and at MAR-ON even if the engine is
not running when the vehicle is stationary. For
this reason, children must never sit on the
front seat, even if the vehicle is not moving. On
the other hand, if the key is inserted in STOP
position, none of the safety devices (air bags or
pretensioners) will be deployed in the event
of impact. Non-deployment of these devices
does not indicate a system malfunction.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Do not travel carrying objects in your
lap, in front of your chest or between
your lips (pipe, pencils, etc.): they could cause
severe injury if the air bag is deployed.
WARNING
If your vehicle has been subject to theft,
attempted theft, vandalism, or flooding,
see your Fiat Dealership to have the air bag
system inspected.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
149
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING
When the ignition key is turned to
MAR-ON, the warning light (with
passenger's front air bag activated) turns on
and flashes for a few seconds to remind you
that the passenger's air bag will be deployed in
a crash, after which it should go off.
WARNING
Do not wash the seats with water or
pressurised steam (wash by hand or at
automatic seat washing stations).
WARNING
The front air bag is designed to be
deployed for impacts of a greater
intensity than for the pretensioners. For impacts
whose intensity falls between the two levels,
normally, only the pretensioners will be
activated.
WARNING
Do not affix rigid objects to the garment
hooks or support handles.
INDEX
150
WARNING
The airbag does not replace seat belts
but increases their efficiency.
Furthermore, since front airbags are not
deployed in low-speed frontal impacts, side
impacts, rear shunts or roll-overs, the
passengers are protected only by the seat belts
which must therefore be fastened at all
times.
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING THE ENGINE
The vehicle is fitted with an electronic engine lock
device: if the engine fails to start, see the paragraph
“The Fiat CODE system” in section “Know your
vehicle”.
It is advisable not to demand maximum
performance from your vehicle (e.g.
excessive acceleration, long distances at
high speeds, excessive intense braking, etc.) during
the initial period of use.
When the engine is switched off never
leave the key turned to MAR-ON to
prevent useless current absorption from
draining the battery.
WARNING
It is dangerous to run the engine in
enclosed areas.The engine takes
in oxygen and releases carbon dioxide, carbon
monoxide and other toxic gases.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
WARNING
Remember that the brake servo and
power steering are not operational until
the engine has been started, therefore much
effort than usual is required on the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
PROCEDURE
Proceed as follows:
❒ ensure that the handbrake is up;
❒ put the gear lever into neutral;
❒ turn the ignition key to MAR-ON: the warning
lights
and
on the instrument panel will
turn on;
❒ wait for the warning lights
and
to switch
off. The hotter the engine is, the quicker this will
happen;
❒ press the clutch pedal down to the floor without
touching the accelerator;
❒ turn the ignition key to AVV as soon as warning
light
switches off. Waiting too long will waste
the work done by the glow plugs.
Release the key as soon as the engine starts.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
151
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
152
If the engine does not start at the first attempt,
return the ignition key to STOP before repeating the
procedure.
If, when the ignition key is at MAR-ON the
warning light remains lit, turn the key to STOP
and then back to MAR-ON; if the warning light
remains lit, try with the other keys provided with the
car.
IMPORTANT Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if
warning light
stays on constantly on the
instrument panel.
WARMING UP THE ENGINE JUST AFTER IT
HAS STARTED
Proceed as follows:
❒ Drive off slowly, letting the engine turn at medium
revs. Do not accelerate abruptly;
❒ Do not demand full performance at first. Wait
until the engine coolant temperature gauge starts
moving.
IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key in
MAR-ON position when the engine is stopped.
Remember that the brake servo and
power steering are not operational until
the engine has been started, so you need
to apply much more force than usual to the brake
pedal and steering wheel.
Warning light
will flash for 60 seconds
after starting or during prolonged
cranking to indicate a fault with the glow
plug heating system. Use the vehicle normally if
the engine starts, but go to a Fiat Dealership
as soon as possible.
Never bump start the engine by pushing,
towing or coasting downhill.This could
cause fuel to flow into the catalytic
converter and damage it beyond repair.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
PARKING
Turn the ignition key to STOP while the engine is
idling.
Proceed as follows:
❒ Stop the engine and engage the handbrake;
❒ engage a gear (on a slope, engage first gear if the
car is facing uphill or reverse if it is facing
downhill) and leave the wheels steered.
If the vehicle is parked on a steep slope, it is
advisable to block the wheels with a wedge or stone.
Do not leave the key in the ignition as this drains
the battery. Always remove the key when you leave
the car.
A quick burst on the accelerator before
turning off the engine serves absolutely no
practical purpose, it wastes fuel and is
especially damaging to turbocharged engines.
In some cases, when the engine switches
off, the fan could start for max. 120
seconds.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Always remove the ignition
key when leaving the vehicle and take it out
with you.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
153
HANDBRAKE
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
The handbrake lever is located to the left of the
driver's seat fig. 162. Pull the lever upwards to
engage the handbrake and ensure that the vehicle
does not move.
Four or five notches are normally sufficient to brake
the vehicle on flat ground, while nine or ten may
be necessary on a steep slope with the vehicle
loaded.
IMPORTANT If this is not the case, contact a Fiat
Dealership to have the handbrake adjusted.
When the handbrake is on and the ignition key is at
MAR-ON, the instrument panel warning light
will
come on.
Proceed as follows to release the handbrake:
❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press release button
A;
❒ keep button A pressed and lower the lever.
The
warning light in the instrument panel will go
out.
Press the brake pedal when carrying out this
operation to prevent the vehicle from moving
accidentally.
IMPORTANT Apply the handbrake lever only when
the vehicle is at a standstill or with the vehicle in
motion only in the event of a failure in the hydraulic
system. If exceptional use is made of the handbrake
with the vehicle in motion, moderate traction is
advisable in order not to cause locking of the rear
end with consequent swerving of the vehicle.
IN AN EMERGENCY
If the vehicle is equipped with selflevelling air suspension, always check that
there is sufficient space above the roof
and around the vehicle when parking. Indeed, the
vehicle could raise (or lower) automatically
depending on load or temperature changes.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
154
fig. 162
F0N0073
USING THE GEARBOX
WARNING
To engage the gears, press the clutch pedal fully and
put the gear lever into the required position (the
diagram is shown on the knob fig. 163).
To engage 6th gear (where provided), operate the
lever by pressing it towards the right in order to
avoid engaging 4th gear by mistake. The action
is similar for shifting from 6th gear to 5th gear.
Press the clutch pedal fully to change
gears correctly. It is therefore essential
that there is nothing under the pedals: make
sure the mats are lying flat and do not get
in the way of the pedals.
IMPORTANT Reverse may only be engaged when the
vehicle is at a standstill. With the engine running,
wait for at least 2 seconds with the clutch pedal fully
pressed before engaging reverse to prevent damage
to the gears and grating.
To engage reverse R from neutral, proceed as
follows: raise ring A under the knob and at the same
time move the gear lever to the right and then
backwards.
Do not drive with your hand resting on
the gear lever as the force exerted, even if
slight, could lead over time to premature
wear of the gearbox internal components.The
clutch pedal should be used only for gear
changes. Do not drive with your foot resting on
the clutch pedal, however lightly. For versions/
markets where provided, the electronic clutch
control could cut in, interpreting the incorrect
driving style as a fault.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 163
F0N0074
155
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
156
LOADING ADVICE
The Fiat Ducato version that you are using has been
designed and type approved on the basis of certain
maximum weights (see "Weights" table in the
"Technical Data" chapter): kerb weight, payload, total
weight, maximum weight on front axle, maximum
weight on rear axle, towable weight.
Each of these must be strictly observed
and MUST NEVER BE EXCEEDED in any
case. In particular, ensure that you never
exceed the maximum permitted weights on the
front and rear axles when arranging the load
on the vehicle (particularly if the vehicle is
equipped with a specific trim level).
IMPORTANT The maximum permitted load on the
floor fastenings is 500 kg; the maximum permitted
load on the side panel is 150 kg.
WARNING
Irregular trajectories and abrupt braking
may cause sudden movements of the
load with consequent situations of hazard for
the driver and passengers: before setting off,
secure the load tightly using the appropriate
hooks on the floor and use steel cables, ropes or
chains strong enough to hold the items to be
secured.
WARNING
If a vehicle is parked on a very steep
gradient or with a side gradient, opening
the rear door or side door could cause any
unsecured items to emerge suddenly.
IMPORTANT For versions with right and left side
flaps, it is advisable to reposition the release lever in
the closed position before lowering the sides.
WARNING
If you wish to carry petrol in a reserve
tank, observe the legal restrictions
and only use a tank that is type approved and
properly secured to the load anchorage
eyebolts. However, by doing so, you increase the
risk of fire in the event of an accident.
In addition to these general precautions, some simple
precautions can improve driving safety, travelling
comfort and vehicle durability:
❒ distribute the load evenly over the floor: if it is
necessary to concentrate it in a single area, choose
an area mid-way between both axles;
❒ remember that the lower the load, the lower the
vehicle's centre of gravity, making for a safer drive:
therefore always position the heaviest goods
lower down;
❒ lastly, remember that the vehicle's dynamic
behaviour is affected by the weight transported: in
particular, the stopping distances are longer,
especially at high speed.
SAVING FUEL
Some useful tips are given below for fuel saving and
reducing harmful emissions of CO2 and other
pollutants (nitrogen oxides, unburnt hydrocarbons,
Particulate Matter (PM) etc.).
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
The general factors that affect fuel consumption are
listed below.
Vehicle maintenance
Have checks and adjustments on the vehicle carried
out in accordance with the “Scheduled Servicing
Plan”.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Tyres
Check the tyre pressure at least once every 4 weeks:
if the pressure is too low, consumption levels
increase as resistance to rolling is higher.
Unnecessary loads
Do not travel with an overloaded boot. The weight
of the vehicle (especially when driving in town)
and its geometry greatly affect fuel consumption and
stability.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
157
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Roof rack/ski rack
DRIVING STYLE
Remove the roof rack or the ski rack from the roof
after use. These accessories decrease aerodynamic
penetration of the vehicle and have a negative effect
on fuel consumption. When transporting particularly
large objects, use a trailer if possible.
The main driving styles that affect fuel consumption
are listed below.
Electrical devices
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Only use electrical devices for the amount of time
needed. The heated rear window, additional
headlights, windscreen/rear window wipers and
heater fan need a considerable amount of energy,
therefore increasing fuel consumption (by up to 25%
in the urban cycle).
Climate control
IN AN EMERGENCY
Air conditioning leads to higher fuel consumption (on
average up to +20%). If the temperature outside
permits, try and use the ventilation only.
Starting
Do not warm the engine with the vehicle at a
standstill or at idle or high speed: under these
conditions the engine warms up much more slowly,
increasing consumption and emissions. It is therefore
advisable to move off immediately, slowly, avoiding
high speeds: in this way the engine will warm up
more quickly.
Unnecessary actions
Avoid revving up when at traffic lights or before
stopping the engine. This and also double declutching
is absolutely pointless on modern cars and also
increases consumption and pollution.
Gear selection
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
158
Devices for aerodynamic control
The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic
control may adversely affect air drag and fuel
consumption.
Use a higher gear as soon as traffic and road
conditions allow. Using a low gear for faster
acceleration will increase consumption.
In the same way improper use of a high gear
increases consumption, emissions and engine wear.
Maximum speed
Traffic and road conditions
Fuel consumption increases considerably with speed.
Maintain a constant speed, avoiding unnecessary
braking and acceleration, which cost in terms of both
fuel consumption and emissions.
Rather high fuel consumption is caused by heavy
traffic, for instance when travelling in a queue with
frequent use of low gears or in large towns with
many traffic lights. Winding mountain roads and
rough road surfaces also adversely affect
consumption.
Acceleration
Sudden acceleration has a very negative effect on fuel
consumption and emissions: accelerate gradually.
CONDITIONS OF USE
The main usage conditions that negatively affect fuel
consumption are listed below.
Cold starting
Short distances and frequent cold start-ups will
prevent the engine from reaching optimal running
temperature.
Consequently, both consumption (from +15 to +30%
on urban cycle ) and emissions will increase.
Stops in traffic
During prolonged stops (e.g. level crossings) the
engine should be switched off.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
159
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
160
TOWING TRAILERS
IMPORTANT NOTES
The vehicle must be provided with a type-approved
tow hook and adequate electrical system to tow
caravans or trailers. Installation should be carried out
by specialised personnel who will issue the required
papers for travelling on roads.
Fit any specific and/or additional rear view mirrors as
specified by the Highway Code.
Remember that, when towing a trailer, steep hills are
harder to climb, braking distances increase and
overtaking takes longer relative to the overall weight
of the trailer.
Engage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than
constantly using the brake.
The weight of the trailer on the vehicle tow hook
will reduce the loading capacity of the vehicle by the
same amount. Consider the weight of the trailer
fully laden, including accessories and luggage, to make
sure you do not exceed the maximum towable
weight (shown on the vehicle registration
document).
Respect the speed limits specific to each country for
vehicles towing trailers. In any case, the maximum
speed must not exceed 100 km/h.
You are advised to fit a suitable stabiliser to the
trailer drawbar.
WARNING
The ABS device with which the vehicle
may be equipped will not control the
braking system of the trailer. Particular caution
is required on slippery roads.
WARNING
Never modify the braking system of the
vehicle to control the trailer brake.
The trailer braking system must be fully
independent from the hydraulic system of the
vehicle.
INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fixed to the body by
specialised personnel in accordance with any
additional information supplied by the manufacturer
of the device.
The towing device must meet current regulations
with reference to Directive 94/20/EEC and
subsequent amendments.
For any version the towing device used must match
the towable weight of the vehicle on which it is to be
installed.
For the electrical connection, a standard connector
should be used which is generally placed on a special
bracket normally fixed to the towing device, and a
special control unit for external trailer light control
must be installed on the vehicle. For the electrical
connection, 7 or 13 pin 12 V DC connections are to
be used (CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards).
Follow the instructions provided by the vehicle
manufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufacturer.
Any electric brake or winch should be powered
directly by the battery through a cable with a
cross-section of no less than 2.5 mm2.
IMPORTANT Electric brakes or other devices must
be used with engine running.
In addition to the electrical branches, the vehicle's
electrical system can be connected only to the supply
cable for an electric brake and to the cable for an
internal trailer light, though not more than 15 W. For
connections, use a preset control unit with battery
cable no less than 2.5 mm2.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
IMPORTANT The trailer tow hook contributes to
the length of the vehicle. When installing on long
wheelbase versions, it is only possible to install
removable tow hooks because the total vehicle
length limit of 6 metres is exceeded.
If no trailer is fitted, the hook must be removed from
the attachment base and it must not exceed the
vehicle's original length.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
IMPORTANT If you wish to leave the tow hook
fitted without towing a trailer, it is advisable to
contact a Fiat Dealership for the relevant system
update operations because the tow hook could be
detected as an obstacle by the central sensors.
IN AN EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
161
Installation diagram for Van versions fig. 164
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
162
The tow hook structure must be fastened in the
points shown by the symbol Ø using a total of 6
M10x1.25 screws and 4 M12 screws.
The internal back plates must be at least 5 mm thick.
MAX LOAD ON BALL: 100/120 kg according to
the payload (see “Weights” table in the “Technical
data” section).
WARNING
After fitting, screw holes must be sealed
to prevent a exhaust gas inlet.
To install a tow hook, the bumpers must be trimmed
as described in the supplier's installation kit.
Installation diagram for Truck and Chassis Cab
versions fig. 165
Another tow hook specific to Truck and Chassis Cab
versions in shown in fig. 165.
The structure Ø must be fixed in the points
indicated using a total of 6 M10x1.25 screws and 4
M12 screws.
MAX LOAD ON BALL: 100/120 kg according to the
payload (see “Weights” table in the “Technical data”
section).
WARNING
After fitting, the screw holes must be
sealed to prevent exhaust gas from
entering.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
M12
Existing hole
STARTING AND
DRIVING
M10 (3x)
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Existing nut
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 164
F0N0189
163
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Existing hole
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 165
164
F0N0250
SNOW TYRES
Any Fiat Dealership will be available to provide
advice concerning the most suitable type of tyre for
the customer's requirements.
The performance of these tyres is considerably
reduced when the tread depth is less than 4 mm.
Replace them in this case.
Due to their specific features, the performance of
snow tyres is much lower than that of normal types
in normal conditions or long motorway stretches.
Their usage should therefore be restricted in
accordance with their type approval.
IMPORTANT When using snow tyres with a
maximum speed index below the one that can be
reached by the vehicle (increased by 5%), place
a notice in the passenger compartment, plainly in
view, which states the maximum speed allowed
by the snow tyres (as per EC Directive).
All four tyres should be the same (brand and track)
to ensure greater safety when driving and braking
and good driveability.
Remember that you should not change the rotation
direction of the tyres.
WARNING
The maximum speed for snow tyres
marked “Q” is 160 km/h, while it is 190
km/h for “T” tyres and 210 km/h for "H" tyres.
You should, however, always stick to the speed
limits of the highway code.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
165
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
SNOW CHAINS
The use of snow chains should be in compliance with
local regulations.
The snow chains may be applied only onto the front
wheel tyres (drive wheels).
Use of Lineaccessori Fiat snow chains is
recommended. Check the tension of the snow chains
after the first few metres have been driven.
IMPORTANT With snow chains, use the accelerator
with extreme care to prevent, or to limit as much
as possible, slipping of the driving wheels that could
cause chain breakage resulting in damage to the
car body or mechanical components.
IMPORTANT Use low-clearance snow chains.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
166
Keep your speed down when snow chains
are fitted; do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid
potholes, steps and pavements and avoid
driving for long distances on roads not covered
with snow to prevent damaging the vehicle and
the roadbed.
PROLONGED VEHICLE INACTIVITY
If the vehicle needs to be off the road for longer than
one month, the following precautions must be
taken:
❒ park the vehicle indoors in a dry and, if possible,
well-ventilated place;
❒ engage a gear;
❒ check that the handbrake is not engaged;
❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal and check
the battery charge. Repeat this check once every
three months during storage. Recharge if the
optical indicator shows a dark colour without the
central green area (see "Battery recharging" in
the section "Dashboard and controls"); If the
vehicle is equipped with a battery disconnection
function (disconnector), see the description of the
procedure in the "Controls" paragraph in the
"Dashboard and controls" section;
❒ clean and protect the painted parts using
protective wax;
❒ clean and protect the shiny metal parts using
special compounds available commercially;
❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber windscreen
and rear window wiper blades and lift them off the
glass;
❒ slightly open the windows;
❒ cover the vehicle with a piece of fabric or
perforated plastic sheet. Do not use compact
plastic tarpaulins, which prevent humidity from
evaporating from the surface of the vehicle;
❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the standard
specified pressure and check it at intervals;
❒ if you don’t disconnect the battery from the
electric system, check its charge every month and
recharge it if the optical indicator shows a dark
colour without the central green area;
❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.
IMPORTANT If the vehicle is equipped with an alarm
system, switch off the vehicle alarm with the remote
control.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
167
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
168
The warning light switches on together with (where
the instrument panel permits) a specific message
and/or acoustic signal. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner Handbook,
which you are recommended to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter
in the event of a failure indication.
IMPORTANT The failure indicators appearing on the
display are divided into two categories: very serious
and less serious faults.
Very serious faults are indicated by a repeated and
prolonged warning "cycle".
Less serious faults are indicated by "warning" cycle
with a shorter duration.
The warning cycle of both failure categories can be
stopped by pressing the button MODE. The
instrument panel warning light will stay on until the
cause of the failure is eliminated.
For messages relevant to the versions equipped with
Dualogic gearbox, see the attached Supplement.
BRAKE FLUID LOW (red) /
HANDBRAKE ENGAGED (red)
Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches
on the warning light, but it should switch off after
a few seconds.
Low brake fluid
The warning light comes on when the level of the
brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum
level due to a possible leak in the circuit.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
WARNING
If the warning light
turns on when
travelling (on certain versions together
with the message on the display) stop the
vehicle immediately and contact a Fiat
Dealership.
Handbrake engaged
The warning light turns on when the handbrake is
engaged.
On certain versions, if the vehicle is in motion, the
warning light switches on together with an acoustic
signal.
IMPORTANT If the warning light comes on when the
vehicle is in motion, check that the handbrake is
not engaged.
AIR BAG FAILURE (red)
Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches
on the warning light, but it should switch off after
a few seconds.
The warning light stays on constantly if there is a
fault in the air bag system.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
The air bag failure warning light switches on if the
passenger bag disabled warning light is faulty.
WARNING
If the warning light does not switch
on when the key is turned to MAR-ON
or stays on when driving, there may be a fault
with the restraint systems. In this case, the
air bags or the pretensioners may not be
activated in the case of an accident or (in a
lesser number of cases) they may be activated
incorrectly. Contact a Fiat Dealership
immediately to have the system checked.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
169
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
170
EXCESSIVE ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (red)
Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches
on the warning light, but it should switch off after
a few seconds. The warning light turns on when the
engine is overheated. If the warning light switches on,
proceed as follows:
❒ When driving normally: stop the car, switch off the
engine and check that the coolant level in the
reservoir is not below the MIN mark. If it is, wait
for the engine to cool down, then slowly and
carefully open the reservoir cap. Top up
with coolant, making sure that the level of fluid is
between the MIN and MAX references on the
reservoir. Also check visually for leaks. If, when
restarting, the warning light switches on again,
contact a Fiat Dealership.
❒ If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions
(e.g. towing trailers uphill or fully loaded): slow
down and, if the light stays on, stop the vehicle.
Wait for 2 or 3 minutes with the engine running
and slightly accelerated to further favour the
coolant circulation. Then stop the engine. Check
correct fluid level in the reservoir as described
above.
IMPORTANT Under severe use of the car, it is
advisable to keep the engine on and slightly
accelerated for a few minutes before switching it off.
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
LOW BATTERY CHARGE (red)
The warning light switches on when the ignition key
is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off as
soon as the engine has started (with the engine
idling, a brief delay before switching off is acceptable).
If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat
Dealership immediately.
ON CONSTANTLY: INSUFFICIENT
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE (red) /
FLASHING: ENGINE OIL
DETERIORATED (red) (MultiJet
versions with DPF only)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the
warning light switches on, but should switch off
as soon as the engine has started.
1. Insufficient engine oil pressure
The warning light switches on constantly, together
with a message (for versions/markets, where
provided) on the display, when the system detects
that engine oil pressure is too low.
WARNING
If the warning light
turns on when
the vehicle is travelling (on certain
versions together with the message on the
display) stop the engine immediately and
contact a Fiat Dealership.
2. Engine oil deteriorated (MultiJet versions
with DPF only)
The warning light
starts to flash together with
a message on the display (for versions/markets,
where provided) when the system detects that the
engine oil has deteriorated.
If the warning light flashes, this does not mean that
the vehicle is faulty, but simply informs the driver
that it is now necessary to change the engine oil as a
result of regular vehicle use. If the oil is not changed,
when a second deterioration threshold is reached,
the warning light
also switches on in the
instrument panel and the engine operation is limited
to 3000 rpm.
If the oil is still not changed, when a third
deterioration threshold is reached, the engine is
limited to 1500 rpm to avoid damage.
To avoid damaging the engine it is
advisable to change the engine oil when
the warning light
flashes. Contact a
Fiat Dealership.
Remember that the deterioration of the engine oil is
accelerated by:
– mainly town use of the vehicle which makes the
DPF regeneration process more frequent
– use of the vehicle for short trips, preventing the
engine from reaching operating temperature
– repeated interruption of the regeneration process,
signalled by the DPF warning light coming on.
Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced
as soon as possible after the warning
light comes on, and never more than 500
km after it first switches on. Failure to observe
the above may result in severe damage to the
engine and invalidate the warranty. Remember
that the operation of this warning light is not
related to the amount of oil in the engine.
Therefore, never top up with oil when the light
starts flashing.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
171
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
INCOMPLETE DOOR/LOAD
COMPARTMENT CLOSURE (red)
On certain versions the warning switches turns on
when one or more doors or the load compartment
are not completely shut.
On some versions, the display shows a dedicated
message that indicates left/right front door or
rear/load compartment door opening.
An acoustic signal is emitted with the doors open
and the vehicle in motion.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED (red)
IN AN EMERGENCY
The warning light on the panel will switch on
constantly when the vehicle is moving and the
driver's seat belt is not correctly fastened. The
warning light will flash and a buzzer will sound if the
front seat belts are not correctly fastened with
the vehicle in motion.
The SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system's buzzer can
be disabled only by a Fiat Dealership.
On some versions the system can be reactivated
from the setup menu.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
172
EBD FAILURE (red) (amber)
Simultaneous switching on of the
and
warning
lights while the engine is running indicates an EBD
system fault or non-availability of the system. Early
locking of the rear wheels may occur in the event of
violent braking causing the vehicle to swerve.
Drive very carefully to a Fiat Dealership to have the
system inspected immediately.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE
(amber)
In normal conditions, when the ignition key is turned
to MAR-ON, the warning light switches on, but
should switch off when the engine starts.
The warning light staying on or switching on when
travelling signals malfunction in the injection system
which could cause possible lack of performance,
poor handling and high consumption levels.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
Under these conditions, you may continue travelling
at a moderate speed without demanding excessive
effort from the engine. In any case, you should go to
a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG
DEACTIVATED (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light switches on when the front
passenger air bag is deactivated.
With the front passenger air bag enabled, when the
ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning
light switches on constantly for about 4 seconds
then switches off.
If the warning light flashes to report a failure of the
warning light , the passenger's protection is
deactivated for markets where passenger air bag
deactivation is available, otherwise it remains on.
ABS SYSTEM FAILURE (amber)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches
on the warning light, but it should switch off after
a few seconds.
The warning light will switch on when the system is
either not working or not available. In this case
the braking system maintains its own unaltered
efficiency but without the extra capacity of the ABS
system. Drive carefully and contact a Fiat Dealership
as soon as possible.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
FUEL RESERVE (amber)
WARNING
Warning light indicates fault of warning
light .This condition is indicated by
intermittent flashing of warning light for more
than 4 seconds. In this case, the warning light
may not indicate a fault in the restraint
systems. Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately
to have the system checked.
SAFETY
IN AN EMERGENCY
When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning
light switches on, but it should switch off after a few
seconds. The warning light switches on when there
are about 10-12 litres of fuel (for versions with
tank capacity 90-120 l) or 10 l (for versions with tank
capacity 60 l) remaining in the tank.
IMPORTANT The warning light will blink to indicate
a system fault. If this is the case, go to a Fiat
Dealership to have the system checked.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
173
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
GLOW PLUG HEATING/GLOW
PLUG HEATING FAILURE (amber)
Glow plug heating
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
This warning light switches on when the key is
turned to MAR-ON. It will switch off as soon as the
glow plugs have reached a preset temperature.
Start the engine as soon as the warning light
switches off.
IMPORTANT At high ambient temperatures the
warning light may stay on for an extremely short
time.
Glow plug heating failure
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
174
The warning light flashes if there is a fault in the
preheating system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon
as possible.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
WATER IN DIESEL FILTER (amber)
Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches
on the warning light, but it should switch off after
a few seconds.
The warning light switches on when there is water
in the diesel filter.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
The presence of water in the supply
circuit may cause severe damage to the
injection system and irregular engine
operation. If the warning light switches on (on
some versions together with the dedicated
message on the display), contact a Fiat Dealership
as soon as possible to have the system bled. If
the above indications come on immediately after
refuelling, water has probably entered the tank:
turn the engine off immediately and contact a
Fiat Dealership.
FIAT CODE VEHICLE PROTECTION
SYSTEM FAILURE (amber)
When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning
light should flash once and then switch off.
When the warning light comes on constantly, with
key in MAR-ON, this indicates:
❒ a potential failure (refer to "The Fiat CODE
system" in the chapter "Know your vehicle").
❒ a possible break-in attempt with an alarm; in this
case the warning light switches after approximately
10 seconds.
If, with the engine running, the warning light
flashes, the vehicle is not protected by the engine
inhibitor device (see “Fiat Code system” in chapter
“Know your vehicle”).
Contact a Fiat Dealership to have all the keys stored
in the memory.
EXTERNAL LIGHT FAILURE
(amber)
The warning light will come on (some versions only)
when a fault to one of the following lights is
detected:
❒ side lights
❒ brake lights
❒ rear fog lights
❒ direction indicators
❒ reversing lights.
The fault relating to these lights could be: one or
more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse or a
break in the electrical connection.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
REAR FOG LIGHTS (amber)
STARTING AND
DRIVING
The warning light switches on when the rear fog
lights are activated.
GENERIC FAILURE INDICATION
(amber)
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
The warning light switches on in the following
circumstances:
Engine oil pressure sensor failure
The warning light switches on when the engine oil
pressure sensor is incorrect.
Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the fault fixed as
soon as possible.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel cut-off inertia switch tripped
The warning light switches on when the fuel cut-off
inertia switch is triggered.
INDEX
175
The display shows a dedicated message.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Rain sensor failure
The warning light switches on when a rain sensor
fault is detected. Contact a Fiat Dealership.
The display shows a dedicated message.
Parking sensor failure
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
176
See description for warning light
.
Daytime running light failure (with
multifunction display)
The warning light comes on when a daylight fault is
detected.
The display shows a dedicated message.
DPF (PARTICULATE FILTER)
CLEANING IN PROGRESS (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches
on the warning light, but it should switch off after
a few seconds.
The warning light switches on constantly to inform
the driver that the DPF system needs to eliminate
the trapped pollutants (particulate) through the
regeneration process.
The warning light does not come on during every
DPF regeneration, but only when driving conditions
require that the driver is notified. The warning
light will go off if the vehicle stays in motion until
regeneration has been completed. As an average, the
process lasts fifteen minutes.
The best conditions to complete the regeneration
process are reached by driving the vehicle at about
60 km/h with engine speed above 2000 rpm. When
this warning light comes on, it does not indicate a
vehicle failure and it should not therefore be taken to
a workshop.
A specific message will appear on the display when
the warning light comes on (for versions/markets,
where provided).
During regeneration, the fan could be
operated.
WARNING
The driving speed should always be
suitable to traffic conditions, weather
conditions and the driver should always comply
with the Highway Code.The engine may be
stopped the DPF light is on; however, repeated
interruption of the regeneration process may
result in premature deterioration of the engine
oil. For this reason, always wait until the
warning light switches off before stopping the
engine as described above. It is not advisable to
complete DPF regeneration with the vehicle
stationary.
ESP-ASR SYSTEM / TRACTION
PLUS FAILURE (amber) - HILL
HOLDER FAILURE (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
BRAKE PAD WEAR (amber)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
This warning light switches on when the ignition key
is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off
after a few seconds.
The warning light switches on if the front brake pads
are worn. In this case replace them as soon as
possible.
A dedicated message is displayed on certain versions.
ESP-ASR system/TRACTION PLUS warning
light
PARKING SENSOR FAILURE
(amber)
If the warning light does not go off or stays on
together with the LED on the ASR button when
travelling, contact a Fiat Dealership.
A dedicated message is displayed on certain versions.
Note Flashing of the warning light while driving
indicates the action of the ESP system.
Hill Holder system failure
The warning light will turn on when the Hill Holder
system is faulty. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership
as soon as possible.
A dedicated message is displayed on certain versions.
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light switches on when a fault is
detected in the parking sensors.
On certain versions, warning light
switches on
instead.
In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership.
A dedicated message is displayed on certain versions.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
177
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
(green) - FOLLOW ME HOME
(green)
Dipped beam headlights
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
The warning light switches on when the dipped beam
headlights are switched on.
Follow me home
The warning light switches on when this device is
active (see “Follow me home” in chapter “Know
your vehicle”).
The display shows a dedicated message.
FOG LIGHTS (green)
IN AN EMERGENCY
The warning light switches on when the front fog
lights are turned on.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
178
LEFT-HAND DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green - intermittent)
The light comes on when the direction indicator
control stalk is moved downwards or, together with
the right-hand indicator, when the hazard warning
light button is pressed.
RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR
(green - intermittent)
The warning light switches on when the direction
indicator control lever is moved upwards or,
together with the left indicator, when the hazard
warning light button is pressed.
CRUISE CONTROL (green)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This warning light switches on when the ignition key
is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off
after a few seconds.
The warning light on the panel switches on when the
Cruise Control ring nut is turned to ON. On certain
versions a dedicated message is displayed.
MAIN BEAMS (blue)
The warning light switches on when the main beams
are turned on.
POWER STEERING FAILURE (red)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON the
warning light on the panel switches on, but it should
switch off after a few seconds.
If the warning light stays on together with the
message shown on the display and an acoustic signal,
the power steering is ineffective and the effort on
the steering wheel increases significantly even though
the vehicle can be steered. Contact a Fiat
Dealership.
SELF-LEVELLING SUSPENSION
FAILURE (red)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FAILURE/ TRANSMISSION OIL
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE (red)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This warning light on the panel switches on when the
ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should
switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light on the panel begins to flash
(together with a message in the display and a
acoustic signal) to indicate that the gearbox is faulty.
The warning light on the panel switches on
constantly (together with the display of the message
and an acoustic signal) to indicate that the automatic
transmission oil temperature is too high.
POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This warning light switches on when the ignition key
is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off
after a few seconds.
The warning light switches on when a fault is present
in the self-levelling suspension system.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
This indication starts flashing when the outside
temperature reaches or falls below 3°C to warn the
driver of the possible presence of ice on the road.
The display will show the dedicated message (only
for versions with a multifunction display).
LIMITED RANGE
The display shows a dedicated message to warn the
driver that the vehicle's range is less than 50 km.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
179
SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
180
The display shows the dedicated message when the
vehicle exceeds the set speed limit (see
“Multifunction Display” in chapter “Know your
vehicle”).
SCHEDULED SERVICING
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The display shows the dedicated message next to the
scheduled servicing warning and stays on until the
service deadline is reached. The warning light goes
off after the service has been carried out at a Fiat
Dealership or once 1000 km have been covered
at the service deadline.
DAYLIGHT FAILURE (with reconfigurable
multifunction display)
The display shows the dedicated message together
with the external light failure icon when daytime
running light failure is detected.
IN AN EMERGENCY
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
In an emergency, we recommend that you call the freephone number found in the Warranty
Booklet.You can also go to the www.fiat.com website to find your nearest Fiat Dealership.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Contact to a Fiat Dealership immediately if
instrument panel warning light
comes on
constantly.
JUMP STARTING
If the battery is flat, the engine may be started using
an auxiliary battery with the same capacity or a
little higher than the flat one.
It is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership to
check/replace the battery.
Proceed as follows to start the car:
❒ raise the flap A fig. 166 to gain access to the
positive battery terminal.
❒ connect the positive terminals (sign + near the
terminal) of the two batteries with a jump lead;
❒ use a second cable to connect the negative
terminal (–) of the auxiliary battery to the earth
point as shown in fig. 167;
❒ start the engine;
❒ when the engine has been started, remove the
leads reversing the order above.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
This procedure must be performed by
expert personnel because incorrect
actions could cause electrical discharge of
considerable intensity. Furthermore, battery
fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact
with skin and eyes. Keep naked flames and
lighted cigarettes away from the battery and do
not cause sparks.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 166
F0N0075
181
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
If after a few attempts the engine does not start, do
not keep trying but contact a Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT Do not directly connect the negative
terminals of the two batteries: sparks could ignite
explosive gas released from the battery. If the
auxiliary battery is installed on another vehicle, avoid
any metal parts on the latter and the vehicle with
the flat battery from accidentally coming into
contact.
BUMP STARTING
Never bump start the engine by pushing, towing or
driving downhill. This could cause fuel to flow into
the catalytic converter and damage it beyond repair.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
182
fig. 167
F0N0076
IMPORTANT Remember that the brake servo and
electrical power steering system are not active until
the engine is started. A much greater effort will
therefore be required to use the brake pedal or turn
the steering wheel.
REPLACING A WHEEL
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Wheel changing and correct use of the jack and
spare wheel (for versions/markets, where provided)
call for some precautions, which are listed below.
WARNING
Indicate that the vehicle is stationary
according to the regulations in force:
emergency lights, refracting warning triangle,
etc. Passengers should leave the vehicle,
particularly if it is very loaded, and wait for the
wheel to be changed away from on-coming
traffic. Apply the handbrake.
WARNING
Repair and refit the standard wheel as
soon as possible. Do not grease the
threads of bolts before fitting them: they might
slip out.
SAFETY
WARNING
Use the jack only to replace wheels on
the vehicle with which it is supplied
or on other vehicles of the same model. Never
use the jack for other purposes, such as lifting
other car models. Never use the jack to carry
out repairs under the vehicle. Incorrect
positioning of the jack may cause the lifted
vehicle to fall. Do not use the jack for loads
higher than those shown on the label.
WARNING
The spare wheel supplied (for
versions/markets, where provided) is
specific for your vehicle.Therefore, it must not
be used on other models. Do not use spare
wheels of other models on your vehicle.The
wheel bolts are specific for your vehicle: do not
use them on different models and do not use
bolts from other models on your car.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
WARNING
Never tamper with the inflating valve.
Never introduce tools of any kind
between rim and tyre. Check tyre and spare
wheel pressure regularly, referring to the values
shown in the "Technical specifications" section.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
183
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Please note that:
❒ the jack weight is 4.5 kg;
❒ the jack requires no adjustment;
❒ the jack cannot be repaired: in the event of a fault
it must be replaced by another original one;
❒ no tool other than its cranking device may be
fitted on the jack.
WARNING
No tools other than the crank provided
should be used with the spare wheel
lifting device; it should be operated by hand
only.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
184
fig. 168
F0N0193
To change a wheel proceed as follows:
❒ stop the vehicle in a position that is not dangerous
for oncoming traffic where you can change the
wheel safely. The ground must be flat and
sufficiently compact;
❒ turn the engine off and pull up the hand-brake;
❒ engage first gear or reverse;
❒ put on the reflective safety jacket (compulsory by
law in certain countries) before getting out of the
vehicle;
❒ indicate that the vehicle has broken down using
the devices required by the law in the current
country (e.g. warning triangle, hazard lights, etc.);
❒ take the extension arm and the wrench from the
tool kit under the passenger seat (see
“Compartment under front passenger seat” in the
“Know your vehicle” section);
❒ for versions with alloy rims, remove the
press-fitted hub cap;
❒ loosen the bolts on the wheel to be replaced by
one turn;
❒ turn the wheel to extend the jack partly;
❒ arrange the jack near the lift support closest to
the wheel to be replaced at the points shown in
fig. 168. For short wheelbase versions with
retractable footboard, the jack must be positioned
at the lift point shown in fig. 169 aligned (45°) so
that it does not interfere with the retractable
footboard;
❒ warn all bystanders that the vehicle is about to be
lifted. They must stay clear and not touch the
vehicle until it is back on the ground.
❒ for versions equipped with self-levelling air
suspension, before raising the vehicle with the jack,
press buttons A and B fig. 170 simultaneously for
at least 5 seconds. The operating mode for raising
the vehicle is activated: the LEDs on the buttons
come on constantly. To exit this mode, press
buttons A and B simultaneously for another 5
seconds; both LEDs on the buttons will go out and
full system operation will be restored. This mode
deactivates automatically when the speed of
approx. 5 km/h is exceeded.
WARNING
On versions equipped with self-levelling
air suspension, never introduce the
head or hands in the wheel arch: the vehicle
could raise or lower automatically depending on
possible load or temperature changes.
❒ lift the vehicle.
After lifting the vehicle:
❒ for all versions, when gaining access through the
vehicle's right rear wheel arch, adjust the screw
A fig. 171 for the wheel retaining device, using the
wrench provided with the extension/adaptor B;
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 169
F0N0194
fig. 170
F0N0677
185
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
❒ turn wrench C fig. 172 anticlockwise 1 to allow
the lowering of the spare wheel;
❒ continue turning anticlockwise until the stop point,
indicated by the stiffening of the manoeuvre or a
click from the clutch present in the device;
SAFETY
WARNING
The device should only be operated by
hand, without using any type of tool
other than the crank provided, like pneumatic
or electrical screwers.
❒ use the wheel dismantling spanner to remove the
wheel from the vehicle fig. 173;
❒ unscrew the retaining knob D fig. 174 and release
the wheel releasing the support E.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 171
F0N0835
fig. 172
F0N0836
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
186
fig. 173
F0N0165
WARNING
The moving components of the jack
(screws and joints) can also cause
injuries: avoid touching them. If you come into
contact with lubricating grease, clean yourself
thoroughly.
❒ use the wheel removal wrench to lower the
vehicle and remove the jack;
❒ fully tighten the bolts, passing alternately from one
bolt to the one diametrically opposite, following
the order illustrated in fig. 176.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
❒ use wrench F fig. 175 to completely unscrew the
bolts and remove the wheel;
❒ fit the spare wheel, aligning holes G fig. 176 with
the pins H. When fitting the spare wheel, ensure
that the wheel support surfaces are clean and free
of impurities that could subsequently cause the
bolts to loosen;
❒ screw in the 5 fastening bolts;
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
fig. 175
F0N0167
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 174
F0N0370
fig. 176
F0N0168
187
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
At the end of the operation:
❒ take the removed wheel, re-attach to the mount E
fig. 174 and tighten the knob D;
❒ introduce the supplied wrench C fig. 172 with the
suitable extension B fig. 171 on the screw A
fig. 171 of the spare wheel housing manoeuvring
device and turn clockwise 2 to lift the spare wheel
back up until it is fully supported in its housing
beneath the floor pan, checking that the
attachment reference D fig. 172 appears in the
window on the device.
WARNING
At the end of the operation of
raising/locking the spare wheel, the
wrench must be extracted, taking care not to
turn it in the wrong direction to facilitate the
extraction of the wrench itself, to prevent
the attachment device from being released and
the wheel assembly not being securely retained
fig. 177.
For vehicles with alloy rims, proceed as follows:
❒ take the kit from the tool box;
❒ fit the appropriate plate A fig. 178 on the alloy
wheel and fix it with the screws supplied B, using
the wrench provided;
❒ re-attach the wheel to the support, rotating it to
the end of the slot (as illustrated in fig. 179) and
screw in knob D;
❒ introduce the supplied wrench C fig. 172 with the
suitable extension B fig. 171 on the screw A
fig. 171 of the spare wheel housing manoeuvring
device and turn clockwise 2 to lift the spare wheel
back up until it is fully supported in its housing
beneath the floor pan, checking that the
attachment reference D fig. 172 appears in the
window on the device.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
188
fig. 177
F0N0837
❒ Check the correct position of the replaced wheel
under the floor (the lifting system is supplied with
a clutch to limit the end of the stroke). Incorrect
positioning may jeopardise safety;
❒ place the removal wrench back in the tool box;
❒ place the tool box in its housing under the
passenger seat.
WARNING
Each time the spare wheel is moved,
check that it is correctly positioned in its
housing under the floor. If it is not correctly
positioned, this could adversely affect safety.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 178
F0N0251
fig. 179
F0N0371
189
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
AUTOMATIC FIX & GO QUICK TYRE
REPAIR KIT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The Fix & Go automatic tyre repair kit is positioned
at the front of the vehicle passenger compartment
and includes fig. 180:
❒ bottle A containing sealer and fitted with:
– a transparent filler pipe B;
– a black pressure restoring pipe E;
– an adhesive label C with the message “max. 80
km/h” to be applied in a position clearly visible by the
driver (on the instrument panel) after repairing the
tyre;
❒ instruction brochure (see fig. 181), to be used for
prompt and correct use of the quick repair kit and
then to be handed to the personnel charged
with handling the tyre treated with the tyre repair
kit;
❒ a compressor D complete with pressure gauge and
connectors;
❒ a pair of protective gloves located in the side
compartment of the compressor;
❒ adapters for inflating different elements.
WARNING
Give the instruction booklet to the
personnel charged with handling the
treated tyre.
In the event of a puncture caused by
foreign bodies, the kit may be used to
repair tyres showing damages on the
track or shoulder up to max 4 mm diameter.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
E
INDEX
190
fig. 180
F0N0825
fig. 181
F0N0178
WARNING
Holes and damage on the tyre side walls
cannot be repaired. Do not use the
quick tyre repair kit if the damage is due to
running with flat tyre.
Replace the cylinder if the sealing fluid
has expired. Dispose of the bottle and the
sealant liquid properly. Have the sealing
fluid and the cylinder disposed of in compliance
with national and local regulations.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
WARNING
WARNING
Repairs are not possible in the case of
damage to the wheel rim (bad groove
distortion causing air loss). Do not remove the
foreign body (screw or nail) from the tyre.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION:
The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair kit is
effective at external temperatures of between -20 °C
and +50 °C.
The sealing fluid has an expiration date.
WARNING
Do not operate the compressor for
longer than 20 consecutive minutes. Risk
of overheating.Tyres repaired with the quick
tyre repair kit must only be used temporarily.
The cylinder contains ethyl glycol.
Contains latex: may cause an allergic
reaction. Harmful if swallowed. Eye irritant.
May cause irritation if inhaled or on contact.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. In the
event of contact, wash immediately with plenty
of water. Do not induce vomiting if swallowed.
Rinse your mouth and drink plenty of water.
Call a doctor immediately. Keep away from
children.The product must not be used by
asthmatics. Do not breathe in the vapours
during insertion and suction. Call a doctor
immediately if allergic reactions are noted.
Store the canister in its proper compartment,
away from sources of heat.The sealing fluid has
an expiration date. Replace the cylinder if the
sealing fluid has expired.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
191
INFLATION PROCEDURE
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
Put on the protective gloves provided
together with quick tyre repair kit.
❒ Pull up the handbrake. Unscrew the tyre valve cap,
take out the flexible filler pipe A fig. 182 and
tighten the ring nut B on the tyre valve;
❒ insert the plug E fig. 184 in the nearest 12 V power
socket and start the engine. Turn the selector D
fig. 183 anticlockwise to the repair position.
Activate the kit by pressing the on/off switch.
Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in the
"Inflation pressure" paragraph, in the "Technical
Data" chapter;
For a more accurate reading, it is advisable to check
the pressure reading on the pressure gauge F fig. 183
with the compressor off and without moving the
centre selector from the repair position;
❒ if after 10 minutes it is still impossible to reach at
least 3 bar, release the transparent filler pipe from
the valve and take out the 12 V plug, then move
the vehicle forwards by about 10 metres in order
to distribute the sealing fluid inside the tyre evenly,
then repeat the inflation operation;
❒ if after this operation you still cannot reach at least
3 bar after 10 minutes, do not resume driving
because the tyre is too damaged and the quick
tyre repair kit cannot guarantee suitable sealing.
Contact a Fiat Dealership;
❒ if the tyre reaches the pressure specified in
“Inflation pressure” paragraph in the "Technical
Data" section, start driving immediately;
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
192
fig. 182
F0N0826
fig. 183
F0N0827
WARNING
WARNING
Apply the adhesive label in a position
clearly visible by the driver as a
reminder that the tyre has been treated with
the quick repair kit. Drive carefully, particularly
on bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not
accelerate or brake suddenly.
❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stop and check
the tyre pressure again; remember to operate the
handbrake;
If the pressure falls below 3 bars, do not
drive any further: the quick tyre repair
kit Fix & Go automatic cannot guarantee
adequate hold because the tyre is too damaged.
Contact a Fiat Dealership.
❒ if a pressure value of at least 3 bar is detected,
restore the correct pressure prescribed in the
paragraph “Inflation pressure” in “Technical
specification” (with the engine running and the
handbrake engaged), resume driving and drive with
care to nearest Fiat Dealership.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
WARNING
Inform the dealership that the tyre has
been repaired using the quick tyre
repair kit. Give the instruction booklet to the
personnel charged with handling the treated
tyre.
WARNING
If different tyres from the ones supplied
with the vehicle are used, it may not
be possible to carry out the repair. If the tyres
are replaced, it is advisable to use those
approved by the manufacturer. Consult a Fiat
Dealership.
fig. 184
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
F0N0182
193
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
FOR CHECKING AND RESTORING
PRESSURE ONLY
The compressor may also be used for restoring
pressure only.
❒ Pull up the handbrake.
❒ Undo the cap for the tyre valve, extract the pipe C
fig. 185 with the quick connector and connect it
directly to the valve of the tyre to be inflated.
❒ Insert the plug in the nearest 12 V power socket
and start the engine.
❒ Rotate the selector clockwise to the pressure
renewal position.
❒ Activate the kit by pressing the on/off switch.
Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in the
"Inflation pressure" paragraph, in the "Technical
Data" chapter.
NOTE If the tyre has to be deflated, press the
dedicated button B illustrated in fig. 186. For a more
accurate reading, it is advisable to check the pressure
reading on the pressure gauge with the compressor
off and without moving the centre selector from
the pressure renewal position.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
B
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
194
fig. 185
F0N0828
fig. 186
F0N0830
CYLINDER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
To replace the bottle, proceed as follows:
❒ press button A fig. 187 to release the part;
❒ fit the new cylinder and press until it is
automatically engaged.
CHANGING A BULB
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
❒ When a light is not working, check that the
corresponding fuse is intact before changing a bulb.
For the location of fuses, refer to the paragraph
"Replacing fuses" in this chapter.
❒ before changing a bulb check the contacts for
oxidation;
❒ burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the
same type and power;
❒ always check the headlight beam direction after
changing a bulb;
Halogen bulbs must be handled holding
the metal part only.Touching the
transparent part of the bulb with your
fingers may reduce the intensity of the emitted
light and even reduce the lifespan of the bulb. In
case of accidental contact, wipe the bulb with
a cloth moistened with alcohol and let the bulb
dry.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 187
F0N0829
195
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
196
WARNING
Modifications or repairs to the electric
system that are not carried out properly
or do not take the system technical
specifications into account can cause
malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
WARNING
Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas,
in the case of breakage they may burst.
IMPORTANT A slight misting may appear on the
internal surface of the headlight: this does not
indicate a fault and is caused by low temperature and
the degree of humidity in the air. Misting will rapidly
disappear when the headlights are switched on.
The presence of drops inside the headlights indicates
infiltration of water. Contact a Fiat Dealership.
TYPES OF BULBS
Various types of bulbs are fitted to your car:
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
All-glass bulbs: (type A) press-fitted. Pull to remove.
SAFETY
Bayonet type bulbs: (type B) to remove them press the
bulb and turn it anticlockwise.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Tubular bulbs: (type C) release them from their contacts
to remove.
Halogen bulbs: (type D) to remove the bulb, release the
clip holding the bulb in place.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Halogen bulbs: (type E) to remove the bulb, release the
clip holding the bulb in place.
INDEX
197
Bulbs
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Bulbs
Type
Power
Figure ref.
Main beam headlamps
H1
55W
D
Dipped headlights/daytime running lights (*)
H15
15/55W
D
Dipped headlights
H7
55W
D
W5W
5W
A
H1
55W
-
Front direction indicators
PY21W
21W
B
Side direction indicators
W16WF(**) /
WY5W (***)
16W (**) / 5W (***)
A
Rear direction indicators
P2IW
21 W
B
Side lights
W5W
5W
A
Rear side lights
R10W
10 W
B
Brake lights
P21W
21 W
B
3rd brake light
P21W
21W
B
Reverse
P21W
21W
-
Rear fog light / Maxi Van rear fog light
P21W
21W
-
Number plate
C5W
5W
A
Front roof light (movable lens)
12V10W
10W
C
Rear roof light
12V10W
10W
C
Front side lights
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
198
Fog lights(*)
(*)for versions/markets, where provided
(**)XL and recreational versions
(***)all other versions
REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS
For the type of bulb and relative power rating, see
the previous paragraph, “Changing a bulb”.
FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS
The front light clusters contain side lights, dipped
beam, main beam and direction indicator bulbs.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as
follows fig. 188:
A direction indicators
B side lights/dipped headlights (double light)
C main beam headlights/daytime running lights
To replace a bulb of the main beam headlights/
daytime running lights, remove cap C fig. 189.
To replace a bulb of the dipped headlights/side lights,
remove cap B fig. 189.
To replace the direction indicator bulb, remove bulb
holder A fig. 189.
After replacement, refit the covers correctly,
ensuring that they are locked in place.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 188
F0N0079
fig. 189
F0N0080
199
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
SIDE LIGHTS
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove protective cover B fig. 189, rotating
anticlockwise;
❒ remove snap-fitted bulb holder A fig. 190, remove
bulb B and replace it;
❒ refit the snap-fitted bulb holder A fig. 190;
❒ refit the protective cover B fig. 189, turning it
clockwise and making sure that it locks correctly.
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove protective cover C fig. 189, rotating it
anticlockwise;
❒ disconnect electrical connector A fig. 191; release
bulb holder catch B;
❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;
❒ fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the
metal part coincides with the grooves on the
curve of the headlight, re-attach catch B and
reconnect connector A;
❒ refit the protective cover C fig. 189, turning it
clockwise and making sure that it locks correctly.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
200
fig. 190
F0N0082
fig. 191
F0N0083
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS/DAYTIME
RUNNING LIGHTS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove protective cover C fig. 189, rotating it
anticlockwise;
❒ disconnect the electrical connector A fig. 192;
❒ rotate bulb holder B fig. 192 anticlockwise and
remove the unit;
❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;
❒ refit the bulb holder B and rotate it clockwise to
lock;
❒ reconnect the electrical connector A;
❒ refit the protective cover by turning it clockwise
making sure to lock it correctly.
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove protective cover B fig. 189, rotating it
anticlockwise;
❒ disconnect the electrical connector A fig. 193;
❒ release bulb holder catch B;
❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;
❒ fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the
metal part coincides with the grooves on the
curve of the headlight, re-attach catch B and
reconnect connector A;
❒ refit the protective cover by turning it clockwise
making sure to lock it correctly.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
With incandescent bulbs
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 192
F0N0517
fig. 193
F0N0084
201
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Side fig. 195
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ turn bulb holder A fig. 194 anticlockwise and
remove it;
❒ remove the bulb by pushing it slightly and turning it
anticlockwise (bayonet mount);
❒ replace the bulb;
❒ refit the bulb holder, turning it clockwise and
making sure that it locks correctly.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ move the mirror manually to permit access to the
two fixing screws A;
❒ using the Phillips screwdriver provided, undo the
screws and extract the bulb holder assembly,
releasing it from the teeth;
❒ undo the bulb and replace bulb B, turning it
anticlockwise.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
202
fig. 194
F0N0081
fig. 195
F0N0520
REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS
FOG LIGHTS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To replace the front fog light bulbs A fig. 196,
proceed as follows:
❒ turn the steering wheel completely to the left;
❒ open the flap on the front wheel arch, undoing the
self-tapping screw;
❒ remove the bayonet cap and disconnect the
connector;
❒ release the bulb holder catch; remove the bulb and
replace it
❒ fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the
metal part coincides with the grooves on the
curve of the headlight, re-attach the catch and
reconnect the electrical connector;
❒ refit the bayonet cap.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as
follows fig. 197:
A brake/side lights
B direction indicators
C reverse lights
D rear fog lights (for Max Van versions, the rear fog
lights are integral with the bumpers, see paragraph
“Maxi Van rear fog lights”).
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 196
F0N0339
fig. 197
F0N0850
203
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
To change a bulb, proceed as follows fig. 198:
❒ open the rear swing door and then undo the two
fixing screws A;
❒ disconnect the central electric connector B and
pull the lens unit outwards;
❒ unscrew the screws C fig. 199 using the
screwdriver provided and remove the bulb holder;
❒ remove the bulb D, E, F, G pushing it gently and
turning it anticlockwise (“bayonet” locking), then
replace it;
❒ refit the bulb holder and tighten the screws C;
❒ reconnect the electrical connector B, correctly
reposition the unit on the body of the vehicle
and then tighten the fixing screws A.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
204
fig. 198
F0N0851
fig. 199
F0N0088
For truck and chassis cab versions:
Undo the four screws H fig. 200 and replace the
bulbs:
I bulb for rear fog light
L bulb for reversing light
M bulb for side light
N bulb for brake light
O bulb for direction indicator.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
REAR FOG LIGHTS (Maxi Van)
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❒ take up position at the rear of the side bumper;
❒ unscrew lower fastening A between central and
side bumper fig. 201 ;
❒ after removing the rear light cluster, unscrew
upper fastening B;
❒ unscrew both fastenings C fig. 202 on the side of
the rear swing door, accessible by opening the
door slightly;
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 200
F0N0881
fig. 201
F0N0241
205
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
❒ unscrew the three side fastenings D on the side of
the panel, accessible after removing the side
moulding fig. 202. To remove the moulding,
unscrew the three lower self-tapping screws and
detach the pins carefully to avoid breaking them. If
one or more pins are broken, they will have to
be replaced;
❒ extract the bulb holder assembly;
❒ turn bulb holder E anticlockwise (1/8 of a turn),
remove the bayonet-fitted bulb by pushing gently
and turning anticlockwise, then replace it fig. 203.
THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❒ undo the two fixing screws fig. 204;
❒ extract the lens unit;
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 203
F0N0243
fig. 204
F0N0141
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
206
fig. 202
F0N0242
❒ press in the tabs B fig. 205 and remove the bulb
holder;
❒ remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace.
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❒ operate in the point indicated by the arrow and
remove the lens unit A fig. 206;
❒ change the bulb releasing it from the side contacts
and making sure the new bulb is correctly fastened
between the contacts;
❒ refit the snap-fitted lens unit.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 205
F0N0142
fig. 206
F0N0089
207
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
REPLACING INTERIOR BULBS
SIDE LIGHTS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❒ for extra-long van:
– undo the two fixing screws C fig. 207 and remove
the light cluster;
– remove the bulb holder D on the rear of the light
cluster, turning it through a 1/4 turn;
– remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace.
❒ for chassis cabs with platform:
– remove the bulb holder on the rear of the light
cluster, turning it through a 1/4 turn;
– remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace.
For the type of bulb and corresponding power rating,
see the paragraph “Changing a bulb”.
FRONT ROOF LIGHT
Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:
❒ operate in the points indicated by the arrows and
remove light A fig. 208;
❒ open protective flap B fig. 209;
❒ replace the bulbs C fig. 209, releasing them from
the side contacts and making sure that the new
bulbs are correctly secured between the contacts;
❒ close flap B fig. 209 and fix roof light A fig. 208
in its housing, making sure that it locks into place.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
208
fig. 207
F0N0244
fig. 208
F0N0090
REAR ROOF LIGHT
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:
❒ operate in the points indicated by the arrows and
remove roof light D fig. 210 ;
❒ open protective flap E fig. 211;
❒ replace bulb F fig. 211, releasing it from the side
contacts and making sure that the new bulb is
correctly locked between these contacts;
❒ close protective flap E fig. 211 and refit roof light
D fig. 210 in its housing, making sure that it locks
into place.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
fig. 210
F0N0092
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 209
F0N0091
fig. 211
F0N0093
209
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
REPLACING FUSES
WARNING
GENERAL INFORMATION
Fuses protect the electrical system: they intervene
(blow) in the event of a failure or improper
intervention on the system. When a device does not
work, check the condition of its fuse: the conductor
element A fig. 212 must be intact. If it is not, replace
the blown fuse with another with the same amperage
(same colour).
B undamaged fuse.
C fuse with damaged filament.
Never replace a fuse with metal wires or
anything else.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition key has been removed
and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
WARNING
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
a Fiat Dealership.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system is triggered, contact
a Fiat Dealership.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
210
Never replace a fuse with another with
a higher amp rating; DANGER OF FIRE.
If a general protection fuse (MEGA-FUSE,
MIDI-FUSE) is activated, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
fig. 212
F0N0094
FUSE LOCATION
The vehicle fuses are grouped in three control units,
located on the dashboard, passenger compartment
right pillar and engine compartment.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Fuse box on the dashboard
SAFETY
To access the dashboard fuse box, fig. 214 loosen the
screws A fig. 213 and remove the cover.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 213
F0N0095
fig. 214
F0N0853
211
Engine compartment fuse box
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
To gain access to the fuse box, fig. 216, remove the
protective cover fig. 215.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
212
fig. 215
F0N0098
fig. 216
F0N0854
Right central pillar optional fuse box
(for versions/markets, where provided)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
To gain access to the fuse box, fig. 218, remove the
protective cover fig. 217.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 217
F0N0172
fig. 218
F0N0855
213
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
214
Dashboard fuse box
fig. 213 - fig. 214
DEVICE PROTECTED
FUSE
AMPS
Right dipped headlamp
F12
7,5
Left dipped headlight
F13
7,5
Engine compartment control unit relay, instrument panel control unit relay
(+key)
F31
5
Lighting of roof lights in the passenger compartment (+battery)
F32
7,5
Battery monitoring sensor for Start&Stop versions (+battery)
F33
10
Minibus interior lights (emergency)
F34
5
Radio, climate control, alarm, tachograph, battery disconnecting unit,
Webasto timer (+battery)
F36
20
Brake light control (main), third brake light, instrument panel (+key)
F37
15
Door lock (+battery)
F38
20
ABS, ASR, ESP, brake light control (secondary) (+key)
F42
20
Windscreen wiper (+key)
F43
5
Driver's side electric window
F47
7,5
Passenger side electric window
F48
5
Parking sensor control unit, radio, steering wheel controls, central control
panel, left control panel, auxiliary panel, battery disconnecting unit (+key)
F49
7,5
Air bag (+key)
F50
-
Climate control, power steering control unit, reverse lights, diesel filter
water sensor, flow meter, tachograph (+key)
F51
-
DEVICE PROTECTED
FUSE
AMPS
Instrument panel (+battery)
F53
-
Absent
F89
-
Left main beam headlamp
F90
-
Right main beam headlamp
F91
-
Left fog light
F92
Right fog light
F93
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
215
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
216
Engine compartment fuse box
fig. 215 - fig. 216
DEVICE PROTECTED
FUSE
AMPS
ABS pump (+battery)
F01
40
Glow plugs (+battery)
F02
50
Ignition switch (+battery)
F03
30
Headlamp washer (+battery)
F04
30
Vaporiser for Puma engine/compartment ventilation with Webasto,
robotised gearbox pump (+battery)
F05
20/50
Engine cooling high speed fan (+battery)
F06
40/60
Engine cooling low speed fan (+battery)
F07
40/50
Passenger compartment fan (+key)
F08
40
Rear power socket (+battery)
F09
15
Horn
F10
15
Electric system (secondary services)
F11
15
Power socket (+battery)
F14
15
Cigar lighter (+battery)
F15
10
Electric system (+key)
F16
7,5
Electric system (primary services)
F17
10
Engine management control unit, robotised gearbox control unit (+battery)
F18
7,5
Air conditioning compressor
F19
7,5
Windscreen wiper
F20
30
DEVICE PROTECTED
FUSE
AMPS
Fuel pump
F21
15
Electric system (primary services)
F22
20
ABS solenoid valves
F23
30
Auxiliary control panel for mirror movement and folding (+key)
F24
15
Mirrors demisting
F30
15
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
217
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
218
Right central pillar optional fuse box
fig. 217 - fig. 218
DEVICE PROTECTED
FUSE
AMPS
Absent
F54
–
Heated seats
F55
15
Rear passenger power socket
F56
15
Additional heater under the seat
F57
10
Left heated rear window
F58
15
Right heated rear window
F59
15
Absent
F60
–
Absent
F61
–
Absent
F62
–
Additional passenger heater control
F63
10
Absent
F64
–
Additional passenger heater fan
F65
–
BATTERY RECHARGING
IMPORTANT The battery recharging procedure is
given as information only. You are advised to contact
a Fiat Dealership to have this operation performed.
Low amperage slow recharging for approximately
24 hours is advised. Charging for a longer time may
damage the battery.
IN THE ABSENCE OF START&STOP
SYSTEM
Charge the battery as follows:
❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal;
❒ connect the charger cables to the battery
terminals, observing the polarity;
❒ turn on the charger;
❒ when finished, turn the charger off before
disconnecting the battery;
❒ reconnect the negative battery terminal.
WARNING
Battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive:
avoid contact with your skin and eyes.
The battery should be charged in a well
ventilated place, away from naked flames or
possible sources of sparks: danger of explosion
and fire.
WARNING
Do not attempt to charge a frozen
battery: it must be thawed first,
otherwise it may explode. If freezing has
occurred, the battery should be checked by
skilled personnel to make sure that the internal
elements are not damaged and that the body
is not cracked, with the risk of leaking
poisonous and corrosive acid.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
219
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
WITH START&STOP SYSTEM
RAISING THE VEHICLE
Charge the battery as follows:
❒ disconnect the connector A (by pressing button B)
from the battery status monitoring sensor C, on
the negative pole D of the battery;
❒ connect the positive cable of the battery charger
to the positive battery terminal E and the negative
cable to sensor terminal F as in fig. 219;
❒ turn on the charger;
❒ at the end of the charging process, switch the
battery charger off;
❒ after having disconnected the charger, reconnect
connector A to the sensor C as in fig. 219.
If the vehicle needs to be lifted, contact a Fiat
Dealership, which is equipped with arm hoists or
workshop lifts.
The vehicle must only be raised laterally by placing
the ends of the arms or workshop lift in the areas
shown in fig. 220.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
220
fig. 219
F0N0551
fig. 220
F0N0340
TOWING THE VEHICLE
The vehicle is equipped with two rings for attaching
the tow hook.
WARNING
WARNING
When towing the vehicle, it is necessary
to obey specific road regulations which
relate both to the towing device as well as to
the behaviour to adopt on the road.
Before towing, switch off the steering
lock (see "Starting device" paragraph
under the "Dashboard and controls" section).
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
WARNING
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Do not start the engine whilst the
vehicle is being towed.
WARNING
The power brakes and power steering
will not operate while the vehicle is
being towed. More effort on the brake pedal
and steering wheel will therefore be required.
The front ring is located in the tool box beneath the
passenger side seat. On versions with Fix&Go kit
and without spare wheel, the tool box is available
only on request for versions/markets where
provided.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
Do not use flexible cables when towing
and avoid jerky movements. During
towing operations, be careful that the fastening
joining the joint to the vehicle does not damage
adjacent components.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 221
F0N0134
221
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
In the absence of the tool box the vehicle tow hook
is housed in the on-board documentation container,
together with the Owner Handbook.
To use it, proceed as follows:
❒ Open the flap A and remove it as illustrated in
fig. 221;
STARTING AND
DRIVING
❒ turn retaining knob B anticlockwise and remove it
fig. 221 to allow the box to come out fig. 222;
❒ take the screwdriver provided from the box and
prise up at the point shown to raise the cap C
fig. 223;
❒ take the tow ring D from the box and screw it
onto the threaded pin fig. 223.
The rear ring B fig. 224 is located at the point shown
in the diagram.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 222
F0N0135
fig. 223
F0N0136
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
222
fig. 224
F0N0117
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct servicing is essential for ensuring long
vehicle life under the best conditions.
This is why Fiat has planned a series of checks and
maintenance operations every 48,000 km depending
on the engine version.
The scheduled servicing does not, however, cover all
the needs of the vehicle; also during the initial
period, before the 48,000 km service and between
one service and the next, ordinary care such as
systematic fluid level checks with top ups and tyre
pressure checks remain necessary.
IMPORTANT The Scheduled Servicing services are
set out by the Manufacturer. Failure to have them
carried out may invalidate the warranty.
Scheduled Servicing is performed by all Fiat
Dealerships, at pre-established times.
If, during any service, the need arises for additional
replacements or repairs, these may be carried out
only with the explicit agreement of the Customer.
IMPORTANT It is advisable to inform a Fiat Dealer
of any small operating irregularities without waiting
for the next service.
The interval between scheduled services must be
reduced if your vehicle is used frequently for towing
trailers.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
223
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN
Thousands of miles
30
60
90
120
150
Thousands of km
48
96
144
192
240
Months
24
48
72
96
120
Check battery charge status and possibly recharge
●
●
●
●
●
Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators,
hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment,
glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system and adjust jets, if
necessary
●
●
●
●
●
Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades
●
●
●
●
●
Check cleanliness of bonnet and tailgate locks and cleanliness and
lubrication of linkages
●
●
●
●
●
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (boots,
sleeves, bushes, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad
wear indicator
●
●
●
●
●
Check condition and wear of rear disc brake pads and operation of pad
wear indicator (for versions/markets where provided)
●
●
●
●
●
Check and, if necessary, top-up fluid levels (engine cooling, hydraulic
clutch/brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Visual check of accessory drive belt(s) (versions without automatic
tensioner) (110 versions (°)- 130 - 150 - 180 MultiJet versions)
(°)Version for specific markets
224
●
●
Thousands of miles
30
60
90
120
150
Thousands of km
48
96
144
192
240
Months
24
48
72
96
120
Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic
tensioner) (^)
●
Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic
tensioner) (115 MultiJet versions (°)) (^)
●
Check condition of toothed timing drive belt (110 versions (°)- 130 -
●
●
SAFETY
●
STARTING AND
DRIVING
●
150 MultiJet versions)
Check condition of toothed timing drive belt (115 MultiJet versions (°))
●
●
●
●
●
Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if required
●
●
●
●
●
Check exhaust gas emissions/smokiness
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of engine management systems (using diagnosis
socket)
●
●
●
●
●
Check cleanliness of sliding side door lower guides for versions with
S.S.D. (or every 6 months)
●
●
●
●
●
Replace fuel filter cartridge (diesel versions)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Replace accessory drive belt(s)
Replace the accessory drive belt(s) (115 MultiJet versions (°))
●
(^) When the engine oil is changed for the first time, check the tension of the accessories drive belt.
(°)Version for specific markets
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
●
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
225
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Thousands of miles
30
60
90
120
150
Thousands of km
48
96
144
192
240
Months
24
48
72
96
120
Replace toothed timing drive belt (*) (110 versions (°)- 130 - 150
●
MultiJet)
●
Replace toothed timing drive belt (*) (115 MultiJet versions (°))
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Replace air cleaner cartridge (***)
●
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
226
●
●
●
Change engine oil and replace oil filter (**) (#)
●
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
●
Replace pollen filter (or every 24 months)
●
●
●
●
●
●
(*) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing belt must be changed every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates,
town driving, long periods of idling) or at least every 5 years. I
(°)Version for specific markets
(***) If the vehicle is equipped with a specific air cleaner for dusty areas: -every 20,000 km check and wash cleaner; every 40,000 km
replace cleaner.
(**) The actual interval for changing the oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled
by the warning light or message (if applicable) in the instrument panel (see chapter "Warning lights and messages") or every 24
months
(#) If the vehicle is driven mainly in towns, change engine oil and oil filter every 12 months.
PERIODIC CHECKS
DEMANDING VEHICLE USE
Before long journeys, check and, if necessary, restore:
❒ engine coolant level;
❒ brake fluid level;
❒ windscreen washer fluid level;
❒ tyre inflation pressure and condition;
❒ operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.);
❒ operation of screen washer/wiper system and
positioning/wear of windscreen/rear window wiper
blades.
To ensure that the vehicle is always efficient and well
maintained, it is advisable to make sure that you
carry out the above operations regularly
(approximately every 1000 km and every 3000 km
for checking and topping up engine oil is advisable).
If the vehicle is mostly used in one of the following
conditions:
❒ towing a trailer or caravan;
❒ dusty roads;
❒ short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km) at
sub-zero outside temperatures;
❒ engine often idling or driving long distances at low
speeds or long periods of inactivity;
you should perform the following inspections more
frequently than shown in the Scheduled Servicing
Plan:
❒ check front disc brake pad conditions and wear;
❒ check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks,
cleanliness and lubrication of linkage;
❒ visually inspect conditions of: engine, gearbox,
transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel
system - brakes) and rubber elements (boots sleeves - bushes - etc.);
❒ check battery charge and battery fluid level
(electrolyte);
❒ visually inspect condition of the accessory drive
belts;
❒ check and, if necessary, change engine oil and
replace oil filter.
❒ check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
227
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
228
CHECKING FLUID LEVELS
Be careful, when topping up, and take
care not to mix up the various types
of fluids: they are all incompatible with
one another and could seriously damage the car.
WARNING
Never smoke while working in the
engine compartment: inflammable gases
and vapours may be present, constituting a fire
risk.
115 MultiJet versions
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 225
F0N0530M
1. Engine coolant fluid 2. Power steering fluid 3. Windscreen washer fluid 4. Brake fluid 5. Engine oil
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
229
110 - 130 - 150 MultiJet versions
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 226
1. Engine coolant fluid 2. Power steering fluid 3. Windscreen washer fluid 4. Brake fluid 5. Engine oil
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
230
F0N0100
180 MultiJet Power versions
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 227
F0N0210
1. Engine coolant fluid 2. Power steering fluid 3. Windscreen washer fluid 4. Brake fluid 5. Engine oil
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
231
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
ENGINE OIL
Engine oil consumption
Check the oil level a few minutes (about 5) after the
engine has stopped, with the vehicle parked on
level ground.
Check that the level is within the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick B fig. 228 - fig. 229 - fig. 230.
The range between the MIN and MAX marks
corresponds to about 1 litre of oil.
If the oil level is close to or actually below the MIN.
mark, pour in the prescribed oil through the filler
A fig. 228 - fig. 229 - fig. 230, until it reaches the
MAX mark.
The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.
The maximum engine oil consumption is usually 400
grams every 1000 km.
When the vehicle is new, the engine needs to be run
in, therefore the engine oil consumption can only
be considered stabilised after the first 5,000 – 6,000
km.
IMPORTANT The oil consumption depends on
driving style and the conditions under which the
vehicle is used.
IMPORTANT After adding or changing the oil, let the
engine run for a few seconds and wait a few minutes
after switching it off before checking the level.
IMPORTANT Always top up using engine oil of the
same specifications as that already in the engine.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
232
fig. 228 - 115 MultiJet versions
F0N0531M
fig. 229 - 110 - 130 - 150 MultiJet versions
F0N0102
WARNING
Be very careful when working in the
engine compartment when the engine is
hot: you may get burned. Remember that the
fan may start up if the engine is hot: this could
injure you. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing
might be pulled by moving parts.
The used engine oil and the filter that has
been replaced contain substances that
are harmful to the environment.To change
the oil and filters, we advise you to contact a Fiat
Dealership.
ENGINE COOLANT
The coolant level must be checked when the engine
is cold and must be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the reservoir.
If the level is low, slowly pour a mixture of 50%
demineralised water and 50% PARAFLUUP by
PETRONAS LUBRICANTS through the filler neck A
fig. 231 - fig. 232 until the level is close to MAX.
A 50-50 mixture of PARAFLUUP and distilled water
gives freeze protection up to –35°C.
For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture
of 60% PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water is
recommended.
PARAFLU UP antifreeze is used in the
engine cooling system. Use fluid of the
same type as that contained in the cooling
system for any top-ups. PARAFLUUP cannot be
mixed with any other type of fluid. If this
happens, do not start the engine and contact a
Fiat Dealership.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 230 - 180 MultiJet Power versions
F0N0211
fig. 231 - 115 MultiJet versions
F0N0532M
233
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WASHING
FLUID
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurised. If
necessary, only replace the cap with
another genuine one or the operation of the
system may be adversely affected. Do not
remove the reservoir cap when the engine is
hot: you risk scalding yourself.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
To top up, remove the cap A fig. 233 - fig. 234.
Use a mixture of water and TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35, in the following
concentrations:
30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 70%
water in summer.
50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 50%
water in winter.
At temperatures below -20°C, use undiluted
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
234
fig. 232 - 110 - 130 - 150 - 180 MultiJet versions
F0N0103
fig. 233 - 115 MultiJet versions
F0N0533M
BRAKE FLUID
Check the level through the reservoir.
WARNING
Do not travel if the windscreen washer
reservoir is empty: using the windscreen
washer is essential for improving visibility.
WARNING
Some commercial windscreen washer
additives are flammable.The engine
compartment contains hot parts which could
start a fire on contact.
Undo the cap A fig. 235 and check that the liquid
contained in the reservoir is at the maximum level.
The fluid level in the reservoir must not exceed
the MAX mark.
If you need to top up, you should use the brake fluid
shown in the "Fluids and lubricants" table (see
chapter "Technical specifications").
NOTE Thoroughly clean the tank cap A and the
surrounding surface.
When opening the cap, make sure that no dirt gets
into the reservoir.
For topping-up, always use a funnel with integrated
filter with mesh equal to or lower than 0.12 mm.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 234 - 110 - 130 - 150 - 180 MultiJet versions
F0N0105
fig. 235
F0N0107
235
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs moisture. For this
reason, if the vehicle is mainly used in areas with a
high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should
be replaced at more frequent intervals than specified
in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan”.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Prevent brake fluid, which is highly
corrosive, from coming into contact with
painted parts. Should it happen,
immediately wash with water.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous and highly
corrosive. If contact accidentally occurs,
immediately wash the affected areas with
water and a neutral detergent, and then rinse
thoroughly with water. Call a doctor
immediately if swallowed.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check that the liquid contained in the tank is at the
maximum level. This operation must be carried
out with the vehicle level and with the engine off and
cold. Check that the fluid level is up to the MAX
mark on the dipstick attached to the fuel cap fig. 236
- fig. 237 (use the level shown on the 20°C side of
the dipstick to check when cold).
If the level of the fluid in the tank is lower than the
specified level, top up using only one of the products
indicated in the "Fluid and lubricants" table in the
"Technical specifications" section, proceeding as
follows:
❒ Start the engine and wait for the fluid level in the
tank to stabilise.
WARNING
The symbol on the container indicates
a synthetic brake fluid, which is
different from a mineral fluid. Using a
mineral-type fluid will damage the special
rubber seals of the braking system beyond
repair.
INDEX
236
fig. 236 - 115 MultiJet versions
F0N0534M
❒ With the engine running, turn the steering wheel
from right to left fully several times.
❒ Top up the fuel to the MAX level and then
retighten the cap.
Do not press the power steering end of
travel lock for longer than 8 consecutive
seconds with the engine running because
it will cause noise and risk damaging the system.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
WARNING
Prevent power steering fluid from
coming into contact with hot engine
parts: it is flammable.
Power steering fluid consumption is
extremely low; if another top-up is
required after only a short period of time,
have the system checked for leaks at a Fiat
Dealership.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 237 - 110 - 130 - 150 - 180 MultiJet versions
F0N0109
237
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
AIR FILTER/POLLEN FILTER
Have the air cleaner replaced by a Fiat Dealership.
AIR CLEANER – DUSTY ROADS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The air cleaner for dusty areas is equipped with a
visual filter block indication device A fig. 238. Check
the reading of the filter blocked device at intervals
(Refer to the "Service Schedule" in the "Maintenance
and care" section).
When the setting is reached the indicator is
triggered B fig. 239, changing to red, even with the
engine off. To reset the indicator, clean/replace
the cartridge as on normal versions and then reset
the indicator by pressing the button C fig. 239.
Because this filter is specific to versions designed for
dusty areas, it is advisable to contact a Fiat
Dealership to change the filter.
POLLEN FILTER
Pollen filter replacement must be carried out at a Fiat
Dealership.
IMPORTANT To clean the filter, use an air jet, do not
use water or liquid detergents.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
238
fig. 238
F0N0253
fig. 239
F0N0254
BATTERY
REPLACING THE BATTERY
The battery is “limited maintenance” type: under
normal conditions of use, the electrolyte does not
need topping up with distilled water.
It does, however, need to be checked periodically at
a Fiat Dealership or by specialist personnel to make
sure it is working correctly.
The battery is located inside the passenger
compartment, in front of the pedal unit. Remove the
protective cover to gain access to it.
If required, replace the battery with an original spare
part with the same specifications.
If a battery with different specifications is fitted, the
service intervals given in the “Scheduled Servicing
Plan” will no longer be valid.
Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for
maintenance.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Incorrect assembly of electric and
electronic devices may cause severe
damage to your vehicle. Contact a Fiat
Dealership if you want to install accessories after
purchasing the vehicle (alarms, radiophone,
etc.): they will suggest the most suitable devices
and advise you whether a higher capacity battery
needs to be installed.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Battery liquid is poisonous and
corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin
and eyes. Keep naked flames and sources of
sparks away from the battery: risk of explosion
and fire.
WARNING
Using the battery with insufficient
battery fluid may irreparably damage
the battery and may cause an explosion.
WARNING
Before performing any operation on the
electrical system, disconnect the
negative battery cable through the suitable
terminal, after having waited at least one
minute from turning the ignition key to STOP.
Batteries contain substances which are
very dangerous for the environment.
To replace your battery, we recommend
contacting your Fiat Dealership to dispose of your
old battery in full respect of the environment
and in compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations.
SAFETY
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
239
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
240
If the vehicle needs to be off the road for
a long period under conditions of intense
cold, remove the battery and take it to
a heated location, otherwise it may freeze.
WARNING
When performing any operation on the
battery or near it, always protect your
eyes with special goggles.
USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDING THE
LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY
To avoid draining your battery and make it last
longer, observe the following instructions:
❒ when you park the vehicle, ensure that the doors,
tailgate and bonnet are closed properly, to prevent
any roof lights from remaining on inside the
passenger's compartment;
❒ switch off all roof lights inside the vehicle: the
vehicle is however equipped with a system which
switches all internal lights off automatically;
❒ do not keep accessories (e.g. sound system, hazard
lights, etc.) switched on for a long time when the
engine is not running;
❒ before performing any operation on the electrical
system, disconnect the negative battery cable;
❒ Completely tighten the battery terminals.
IMPORTANT If the charge level remains under 50%
for a long time, the battery is damaged by sulphation,
reducing its capacity and efficiency at start-up.
The battery is also more prone to the risk of freezing
(at temperatures as high as -10°C).
Refer to the paragraph "Car inactivity" in "Starting
and driving" if the car is left parked for a long time.
If, after buying the vehicle, you want to install
electric accessories which require permanent electric
supply (alarm, etc.) contact a Fiat Dealership whose
qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the
most suitable devices from the Lineaccessori Fiat,
will evaluate the overall electric absorption, checking
whether the vehicle's electrical system is capable of
withstanding the load required, or whether it should
be integrated with a more powerful battery.
Since these devices continue absorbing energy even
when the engine is off, they gradually run down
the battery.
IMPORTANT If a tachograph is fitted, if the vehicle is
parked for a long period of 5 days, it is advisable to
disconnect the negative battery terminal to maintain
its charge.
If the vehicle is equipped with a battery
disconnection function (disconnector), see the
description of the procedure in the "Controls"
paragraph in the "Know your vehicle" section.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Check the pressure of each tyre, including the
space-saver wheel, every two weeks and before long
journeys. The pressure should be checked with the
tyre rested and cold.
It is normal for the pressure to increase when the
vehicle is used; for the correct tyre inflation
pressure, see “Wheels” in the “Technical
specifications” section.
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre wear
fig. 240:
A normal pressure: tread evenly worn;
B low pressure: tread particularly worn at the edges;
C high pressure: tread particularly worn in the
centre.
The tyres must be replaced when the tread is less
than 1.6 mm thick. In any case, follow the laws
in force in the country where you are driving.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
241
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
IMPORTANT NOTES
❒ As far as possible, avoid sharp braking and screech
starts. Be careful not to hit the kerb, potholes or
other hard obstacles. Driving for long stretches
over bumpy roads can damage the tyres;
❒ periodically check that the tyres have no cuts in
the side wall, abnormal swelling or irregular tyre
wear. Contact a Fiat Dealership if required;
❒ avoid overloading the car when travelling: this may
cause serious damage to the wheels and tyres;
❒ if a tyre is punctured, stop immediately and change
it to avoid damage to the tyre, the rim,
suspensions and steering system;
❒ tyres age even if they are not used much. Cracks in
the tread and on the sidewalls are a sign of ageing.
Have the tyres checked by skilled personnel if
they have been fitted for longer than six years.
WARNING
Remember that the road holding
qualities of your vehicle also depend on
the correct inflation pressure of the tyres.
WARNING
If the pressure is too low the tyre
overheats and can be seriously
damaged.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING
Do not switch tyres from the righthand
side of the vehicle to the lefthand
side, and vice versa.
INDEX
242
Remember to check the spare wheel very
carefully;
❒ In the case of replacement, always fit new tyres,
avoiding those of dubious origin;
❒ If a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve;
❒ to allow even wear between the front and rear
tyres, it is advisable to change them over every
10-15 thousand kilometres, keeping them on the
same side of the vehicle so as not to reverse
the direction of rotation.
fig. 240
F0N0111
WARNING
Never submit alloy rims to repainting
treatments requiring the use of
temperatures exceeding 150°C.The mechanical
properties of the wheels could be impaired.
RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel system rubber
hoses are concerned, follow the “Scheduled Servicing
Plan” in this section carefully.
Ozone, high temperatures and a prolonged lack of
fluid in the system may cause hardening and cracking
of the hoses, which could result in leaks. Careful
checking is therefore necessary.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
243
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
WINDSCREEN WIPER
BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using special
products; TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 is
recommended.
Replace the blades if the rubber edge is deformed or
worn. In any case, it is advisable to replace them
approximately once a year.
A few simple precautions can reduce the possibility
of damage to the blades:
❒ if the temperature falls below zero, make sure that
ice has not frozen the rubber against the glass. Use
a de-icing product to release it if required;
❒ remove any snow from the glass: in addition to
protecting the blades, this prevents effort on
the motor and over-heating;
❒ do not operate the windscreen and rear window
wipers on dry glass.
Replacing the wiper blades
Proceed as follows:
❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm A fig. 241 and
position the blade so that it forms an angle of 90°
with the arm;
❒ remove the press-fitted blade B from arm A;
❒ insert the new blade making sure it is locked into
place.
WARNING
Driving with worn wiper blades is a
serious hazard, because visibility is
reduced in bad weather.
INDEX
244
fig. 241
F0N0137
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
SPRAY NOZZLES
Front windscreen (washer) fig. 242
If there is no jet of fluid, firstly check that there is
fluid in the reservoir (see “Checking fluid levels”
in this chapter).
Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged;
use a needle to unblock them if necessary.
The washer jets should be positioned by adjusting
the angle of the sprays using a small straight-headed
screwdriver.
The jets must be directed at about 1/3 of the height
from the top edge of the windscreen.
Check the condition and cleanliness of nozzles at
regular intervals.
The headlamp washers are activated automatically
when the screen washer is operated with the dipped
headlamps on.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 242
F0N0112
245
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
246
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are the following:
❒ atmospheric pollution;
❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or hot humid
climates);
❒ seasonal environmental conditions.
The abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust
and sand, as well as mud and gravel raised by other
vehicles is also not to be underestimated.
On your vehicle, Fiat has implemented the best
manufacturing technologies to effectively protect the
bodywork against corrosion.
These include:
❒ painting products and systems which give the
vehicle particular resistance to corrosion and
abrasion;
❒ Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel sheets, with
high resistance to corrosion;
❒ spraying the underbody, engine compartment,
wheelhouse internal parts and other parts with
highly protective wax products;
❒ spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function
in the more exposed points: underdoor, inner
wing, edges, etc;
❒ use of “open” boxed sections to prevent
condensation and pockets of moisture from
triggering rust inside.
VEHICLE BODY AND UNDERBODY
WARRANTY
Your vehicle is covered by warranty against
perforation due to rust of any original element of the
structure or body.
For the general terms of this warranty, refer to your
Warranty Booklet.
ADVICE FOR PRESERVING THE
BODYWORK
Paint
Paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose,
but also protects the underlying sheet metal.
Touch-up abrasions and scratches immediately to
prevent the formation of rust. Only use genuine
spare paint products for touch-ups (see “Bodywork
paint identification plate” in the “Technical
Specifications” section).
Standard maintenance of paintwork consists in
washing the vehicle; its frequency depends on the
conditions and environment where the vehicle
is used.
For example, it is advisable to wash the vehicle more
often in areas with high atmospheric pollution or if
you are travelling on roads spread with salt.
To correctly wash the vehicle proceed as follows:
❒ wash the body using a low pressure jet of water;
❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over
the bodywork, frequently rinsing with the sponge;
❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jet of air or a
chamois leather.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
247
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
248
If you put the vehicle through a car wash, follow
these recommendations:
❒ remove the aerial from the roof so it does not get
damaged;
❒ the car wash should use water added to a soapy
solution;
❒ rinse thoroughly to avoid soap marks staying on
the bodywork or less visible parts.
Some car washes with old-style blades
and/or in a poor state of repair can
damage the paintwork, facilitating the
formation of lines that give the paint a dull/misty
appearance, especially on dark colours. If this
happens, lightly polish the paintwork with
appropriate products.
Dry the less visible parts, such as the door frames,
bonnet and the headlight frames with special care, as
in these areas water may stagnate more easily. It is
a good idea to leave the vehicle outdoors for a while
after washing it to give the water time to evaporate.
Do not wash the vehicle after it has been left in
the sun or with the bonnet hot: this may alter the
shine of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts should be cleaned in the same
way as the rest of the vehicle. Where possible, do
not park the vehicle under trees; the resinous
substances released by many species give the paint a
dull appearance and increase the possibility of rust.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be washed off
immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain
is particularly aggressive.
Detergents pollute the environment.The
vehicle should be washed in areas
equipped for collecting and purifying the
liquid used in the washing process.
Windows
Front headlights
To clean windows, use specific cleaning products.
Also use clean cloths to avoid scratching the glass or
damaging the transparency.
IMPORTANT Never use aromatic substances (e.g.
petrol) or ketenes (e.g. acetone) for cleaning the
plastic lenses of the front headlights.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
IMPORTANT Wipe the rear window inside gently
with a cloth in the direction of the filaments to avoid
damaging the heating device.
SAFETY
Engine compartment
STARTING AND
DRIVING
At the end of each winter, thoroughly wash the
engine compartment, taking care to avoid spraying
the water jet directly onto the electronic control
units and the relay/fuse box on the left side of the
engine compartment (driving direction). Have this
operation performed at a specialised workshop.
IMPORTANT The washing should take place with the
engine cold and the ignition key in the STOP
position. After the washing operation, make sure
that the various protections (e.g. rubber caps and
guards) have not been removed or damaged.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
249
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Regularly check that water is not trapped under the
mats (due to water dripping off shoes, umbrellas,
etc.), as this could cause oxidation of the sheet
metal.
Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner.
It is advisable to use a moist brush on velvet
upholstery.
WARNING
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
250
Never use flammable products, such as
petroleum ether or modified petrol,
to clean the inside of the vehicle.The
electrostatic charges which are generated by
rubbing during the cleaning operation may
cause a fire.
WARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans in the vehicle:
they might explode. Aerosol cans must
not be exposed to a temperature exceeding
50°C.When the vehicle is exposed to sunlight,
the internal temperature can greatly exceed
this value.
Rub the seats with a sponge and a solution of water
and mild soap.
PLASTIC PARTS
It is advisable to clean interior plastic parts with a
damp cloth and a solution of water and mild,
non-abrasive detergent. Use specific products for
cleaning plastic, without solvents and specifically
designed to prevent damage to the appearance and
colour of the treated parts to remove grease and
tough stains.
IMPORTANT Never use spirits or petroleum to
clean the instrument panel.
LEATHER STEERING WHEEL/GEAR
KNOB/HANDBRAKE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
These components must be cleaned with mild soap
and water only. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based
products.
Read the product label carefully before using specific
products for cleaning the interiors: make sure the
product does not contain spirits or alcohol-based
substances.
If, when cleaning the windscreen with special
products, window cleaner accidentally drips onto the
leather of the steering wheel/gear lever knob/hand
brake, wipe away immediately and then wash the
affected area with mild soap and water.
IMPORTANT Be careful when using a steering wheel
lock device, where applicable, to avoid damaging
the leather upholstery by rubbing.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
251
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION DATA
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
We recommend taking note of the identification
codes. Identification codes are printed and shown on
the plates as indicated below, together with the
positions:
❒ VIN plate.
❒ Chassis marking.
❒ Bodywork paint identification plate.
❒ Engine marking.
V.I.N. PLATE
IN AN EMERGENCY
This plate is fitted to the engine compartment front
crossmember and contains the following data
fig. 243:
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
252
fig. 243
F0N0333
B Type-approval number.
C Vehicle type identification code
D Chassis serial number.
E Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden
F Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden
plus trailer.
G Maximum permitted weight on first (front) axle
H Maximum permitted weight on second (rear) axle
I Engine type.
L Bodywork version code.
M Spares number.
N Correct value of smoke coefficient (for diesel
engines)
CHASSIS MARKING
They are located respectively: one on the passenger
side interior wheel arch, A fig. 244, and the other
on the low part of the windscreen fig. 245.
The marking includes:
❒ type of vehicle;
❒ chassis serial number.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION
PLATE
This plate is fitted to the engine compartment front
crossmember fig. 246 and contains the following
data:
A Paint manufacturer.
B Colour name.
C Fiat colour code.
D Respray and touch up code.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
ENGINE MARKING
fig. 244
F0N0162
This is stamped on the cylinder block and gives the
model and the chassis serial number.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 245
F0N0338
fig. 246
F0N0160
253
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK
VERSION
Version
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Engine code
110 MultiJet (*)
F1AE3481G
115 MultiJet (*)
250A1000
130 MultiJet
F1AE3481D
150 MultiJet
F1AE3481E
180 MultiJet Power
F1CE3481E
(*)Version for specific markets
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
254
There is an example of a bodywork version code below by way of explanation with a key which is valid for all
bodywork version codes:
Example:
250 A M M F A DX
250 MODEL
A GVW
M ENGINE
M ENGINE TRANSMISSION/AXLES
F BODYWORK
A WHEELBASE
RH VERSION
GVW
A 3000 kg
B 3300 kg
C 3500 kg
D 3500 kg MAXI
E 4005/4250 kg
F 2800 kg
G 3650 kg
ENGINE
M 130 MultiJet
N 150 MultiJet
P 180 MultiJet Power
R 115 MultiJet
V 110 MultiJet
TRANSMISSION
M Manual gearbox
A Automatic gearbox
WHEELBASE
A Short wheelbase
B Medium wheelbase
C Long wheelbase
D Medium-long wheelbase
U All wheelbases (incomplete vehicles)
BODYWORK
A Cab chassis
B Chassis without cab
C Platform chassis cab
D Box truck
E Primary school bus
F Van
G Long cab trailer
H Long cab chassis
L Middle school bus
M Bus
P Panorama
R 6/9 seater crew cab
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
255
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
ENGINE
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
256
115 MultiJet
(*)
(*)
F1AE3481G
150 MultiJet
180 MultiJet
Power
250A1000
F1AE3481D
F1AE3481E
F1CE3481E
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Number and arrangement
of cylinders
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
Piston diameter and travel
(mm)
88 x 94
83 x 90.4
88 x 94
88 x 94
95.8 x 104
Total displacement (cm3)
2287
1956
2287
2287
2999
16,2 : 1
16,5 : 1
16,2 : 1
16,2 : 1
17,5 : 1
Maximum power (EEC)
(kW)
82,5
84,6
96
109
130
Maximum power (EEC)
(HP)
110
115
130
148
177
Corresponding engine
speed (rpm)
3600
3750
3600
3600
3500
Max torque (EEC) (Nm)
300
280
320
350
400
Corresponding engine
speed (rpm)
1800
1500
1800
1500
1400
Type code
SAFETY
110 MultiJet
130 MultiJet
General information
Cycle
Compression ratio
Fuel
(*)Version for specific markets
Diesel for motor vehicles (EN590 specification)
FUEL SUPPLY
Versions
All
Fuel supply
Common Rail direct injection
WARNING
Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not
take the system's technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to
the risk of fire.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
257
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
TRANSMISSION
Versions
115 MultiJet (*)
SAFETY
110 MultiJet (*)
STARTING AND
DRIVING
130 MultiJet
150 MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
258
Drive
Self-adjusting pedal
without idle stroke
Front
Five forward gears and
reverse with synchronizers
for forward gear
engagement
Six forward gears plus
reverse with synchronisers
for forward gear
engagement
SUSPENSION
Front
Rear
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
Clutch
(*)Version for specific markets
Versions
IN AN EMERGENCY
Gearbox
Front
Rear
independent wheel MacPherson type
Tubular rigid beam axle; longitudinal leaf
spring
BRAKES
Front service brakes
Rear service brakes
Parking brake
self-ventilated discs
discs
controlled by hand lever, working on rear
brakes
IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking
efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.
STEERING
Versions
Turning circle (m)
Short wheelbase
11,06
Medium wheelbase
12,46
Medium-long wheelbase
13,54
Long wheelbase
14,28
Type
rack and pinion with hydraulic power
steering
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
259
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
WHEELS
CORRECT READING OF THE TYRE
RIMS AND TYRES
Example: 215/70 R 15 109S (see fig. 247)
215 Rated width (S, distance in mm between
sidewalls)
70 Height/width ratio (H/S) as a percentage
R Radial tyre
15 Rim diameter in inches (Ø)
109 Load rating (capacity)
S Maximum speed rating
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless radial carcass
tyres. The vehicle registration document also lists all
type-approved tyres.
IMPORTANT If there are any discrepancies between
the Owner handbook and the registration document,
take the information from the latter.
For safe driving, the vehicle must be fitted with tyres
of the same make and type on all wheels.
IMPORTANT Do not use tubes with tubeless tires.
SPARE WHEEL
Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
WHEEL GEOMETRY
Front wheel toe-in measured from rim to rim: -1 ± 1
mm.
The values refer to the vehicle in running order.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
260
fig. 247
F0N0113
Maximum speed rating
Q up to 160 km/h
R up to 170 km/h
S up to 180 km/h
T up to 190 km/h
U up to 200 km/h
H up to 210 km/h
V up to 240 km/h
Maximum speed index for snow tyres
QM + S up to 160 km/h
TM + S up to 190 km/h
HM + S up to 210 km/h
Load rating (capacity)
70 335 kg
71 345 kg
72 355 kg
73 365 kg
74 375 kg
75 387 kg
76 400 kg
77 412 kg
78 425 kg
79 437 kg
80 450 kg
81 462 kg
82 475
83 487
84 500
85 515
86 530
87 545
88 560
89 580
90 600
91 615
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
261
RIM PROTECTOR TYRES
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
CORRECT READING OF THE WHEEL RIM
WARNING
DO NOT fit hub caps when using
integral caps fixed (with springs) to the
steel rim and aftersale tyres provided with Rim
Protector fig. 248. Use of unsuitable tyres and
wheel caps may cause sudden loss of tyre
pressure.
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
262
fig. 248
F0N0860
Example: 6J x 15 ET 43 (see fig. 247)
6 rim diameter in inches (1).
J rim drop centre outline (side projection where the
tyre bead rests) (2).
15 rim nominal diameter in inches (corresponds to
diameter of the tyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø).
ET 43 wheel camber (distance between the disc/rim
support plane and the wheel rim centre line).
RIMS AND TYRES PROVIDED AS STANDARD
Versions
Rims
Tyres provided
Ducato (*)
6Jx15'' - H2
205/70 R15C 106/104R (*)
Ducato (except
recreational)
6Jx15'' - H2
Ducato
(recreational)
6Jx15'' - H2
Ducato Maxi
(except
recreational)
6Jx16'' - H2
Ducato Maxi
(recreational)
6Jx16'' - H2
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
215/70 R15C 109/107S
225/70 R15C 112/110S
SAFETY
215/70 R15CP 109/107Q
215/70 R16C 116/114R
STARTING AND
DRIVING
225/75 R16C 118/116R
225/75 R16C 116/114Q
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
(*) Version for specific markets
If using M+S winter tyres with speed index lower than “S” for 15" wheels and “R” for 16" wheels, respect the
max. vehicle speed indicated in the table: Maximum speed index.
IN AN EMERGENCY
IMPORTANT Only use the tyres indicated on the vehicle registration document.
If using class C tyres on a Camping vehicle, always use wheels with a metal inflation valve. When replacing, it
is always advisable to use Camping tyres.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
263
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Tyres provided
Use
Front
Rear
3000 GVW (*) with basic tyres, except for
PANORAMA 3300 GVW (*) / 3500 GVW
(*) with basic tyres
4,0 ± 0,05
4,0 ± 0,05
4,1 ± 0,05
4,5 ± 0,05
PANORAMA with basic tyres
4,1 ± 0,05
4,5 ± 0,05
3000 GVW (*) with oversized tyres, except
4,0 ± 0,05
4,0 ± 0,05
for PANORAMA 3300 GVW (*) / 3500
GVW (*) with oversized tyres
4,1 ± 0,05
4,5 ± 0,05
Winter tyres M+S class C on Camping vehicle
4,3 ± 0,05
4,75 ± 0,05
PANORAMA with oversized tyres
4,1 ± 0,05
4,5 ± 0,05
Range with camping tyres
5,0 ± 0,05
5,5 ± 0,05
215/75 R16
Maxi range with basic tyres
4,5 ± 0,05
5,0 ± 0,05
225/75 R16
Maxi range with oversized tyres
4,5 ± 0,05
5,0 ± 0,05
225/75 R16 C
Winter tyres M+S class C on Camping vehicle
5,2 ± 0,05
5,2 ± 0,05
225/75 R16 CP
Maxi range with Camping tyres
5,5 ± 0,05
5,5 ± 0,05
215/70 R15
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
215/70 R15
225/70 R15
225/70 R15 C
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
264
225/70 R15
215/70 R15 CP
(*)Gross vehicle weight
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed pressure when the tyres are warm. However, recheck that the value is correct
with the tyre cold. With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard
tyres.
DIMENSIONS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
VAN VERSION
Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle fitted with standard tyres.
Height is measured with the vehicle unladen.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
fig. 249
F0N0852
INDEX
265
VAN
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
266
CH1 - CH2
MH1 - MH2
LH2 - LH3
XLH2 - XLH3
A
948
948
948
948
B
3000
3450
4035
4035
C
1015
1015
1015
1380
D
4963
5413
5998
6363
E
2254 - 2524
2254 - 2524
2524 - 2764
2524 - 2764
F
1810
1810
1810
1810
G
2050
2050
2050
2050
I
1790
1790
1790
1790
The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above
TRUCK VERSION
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle fitted with standard tyres.
Height is measured with the vehicle unladen.
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 250
F0N0342
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
267
FLATBED
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
268
CHASSIS CAB
CH1
MH1
LH1
XLH1
CH1
MH1 MLH1
LH1
XLH1
XXLH1
A
948
948
948
948
948
948
948
948
948
B
3000
3450
4035
4035
3000
3450 3800
4035
4035
4300
C
1345
1345
1345
1710
960
960
960
1325
1590
D
5293
5743
6328
6693
4908
5358 5708
5943
6308
6573
E
2798
3248
3833
4198
-
-
-
-
-
F
2254
2254
2254
2254
2254
2254
2254
2254
2519
G
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
H
1790
1790
1790
1790
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
L
2100
2100
2100
2100
2050
2050
2050
2050
2050
The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above
CHASSIS COWL
SPECIAL CAB
CH1
MH1 MLH1
CH1
MH1 MLH1
LH1
XLH1
XXLH1
LH1
XLH1
XXLH1
A
925
925
925
925
925
948
948
948
948
948
B
3000
3450 3800
4035
4035
4300
3000
3450 3800
4035
4035
4300
C
860
860
860
1225
1490
880
880
880
1245
1510
D
4785
5235 5585
5820
6125
6390
4828
5278 5628
5863
6228
6493
E
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
F
-
-
-
-
-
2254
2254
2254
2254
2254
G
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
H
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
1790 1980
L
2050
2050
2050
2050
2050
2050
2050
2050
2050
2050
The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
269
SPECIAL CHASSIS COWL
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
270
CH1
MH1 - MH2
LH1
XLH1
XXLH1
A
925
925
925
925
925
B
3000
3450 - 3800
4035
4035
4300
C
880
880
880
1245
1510
D
4805
5255 - 5605
5840
6205
6470
G
1810
1810
1810
1810
1810
H
1790 - 1980
1790 - 1980
1790 - 1980
1790 - 1980
1790 - 1980
L
2050
2050
2050
2050
2050
The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above
PERFORMANCE
Top permitted speed after initial vehicle use in km/h.
110 MultiJet (*)
VAN
TRUCKS
WITH
TRAILER
(*) Maxi range
115 MultiJet
(*)
130 MultiJet
150 MultiJet
180 MultiJet
Power
CH1 - MH1
145
148
155
161 (*) / 162
161 (*) / 171
CH2 - MH2 LH2 - XLH2
142
143
150
157
160 (*) / 166
LH3 - XLH3
137
138
145
152
155 (*) / 161
145
148
155
157
161 (*) / 171
CH1
MH1 - LH1
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
271
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
WEIGHTS
VAN WEIGHTS
3000 kg GVW versions(***)
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130/150
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1845 ÷ 1910
1860 ÷ 1925
1910 ÷ 1975
Payload (*) including the driver:
1090 ÷ 1155
1075 ÷ 1140
1025 ÷ 1090
– front axle:
1630
1630
1630
– rear axle:
1650
1650
1650
– total:
3000
3000
3000
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
Maximum load on roof (evenly distributed):
150
150
150
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
272
(***)The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides.
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
VAN WEIGHTS
3300 kg GVW versions(***)
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130/150
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1845 ÷ 1985
1860 ÷ 2000
1910 ÷ 2050
Payload (*) including the driver:
1315 ÷ 1455
1300 ÷ 1440
1250 ÷ 1390
– front axle:
1750
1750
1750
– rear axle:
1900
1900
1900
– total:
3300
3300
3300
Towable loads (braked trailer):
2000
2500
2500
Towable loads (non-braked trailer):
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
Maximum load on roof (evenly distributed):
150
150
150
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Maximum permitted loads (**)
(***)The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides.
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
273
VAN WEIGHTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
3500 kg GVW versions(***)
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130/150
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1845 ÷ 1985
1860 ÷ 2000
1910 ÷ 2050
Payload (*) including the driver:
1515 ÷ 1655
1500 ÷ 1640
1450 ÷ 1590
– front axle:
1850
1850
1850
– rear axle:
2000
2000
2000
– total:
3500
3500
3500
Towable loads (braked trailer):
2000
2500
2500
Towable loads (non-braked trailer):
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
Maximum load on roof (evenly distributed):
150
150
150
Maximum permitted loads (**)
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
274
(***)The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides.
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
VAN WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
Versions with GVW 3500 kg
Versions with GVW 4000 kg
(***)
(***)
110
(°)/130/150
MultiJet
110
180 MultiJet
Power
(°)/130/150
MultiJet
180 MultiJet
Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1940 ÷ 2090
1990 ÷ 2140
2010 ÷ 2135
2060 ÷ 2185
Payload (*) including driver:
1410 ÷ 1560
1360 ÷ 1510
1865 ÷ 1990
1815 ÷ 1940
– front axle:
2100
2100
2100
2100
– rear axle:
2400
2400
2400
2400
– total:
3500
3500
4000
4000
Towable loads (braked trailer):
3000
3000
2500
2500
Towable loads (non-braked trailer):
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
120
120
100
100
Maximum load on roof (evenly distributed):
150
150
150
150
Maximum permitted loads (**)
(***)The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides.
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
275
TRUCK TRAILER WEIGHTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
3000 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1795 ÷ 1840
1810 ÷ 1855
1860 ÷ 1905
Payload (*) including the driver:
1125 ÷ 1160
1125 ÷ 1145
1095 ÷ 1140
– front axle:
1630
1630
1630
– rear axle:
1650
1650
1650
2920-3000
2935-3000
2935-3000
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
STARTING AND
DRIVING
– total:
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
276
Towable loads:
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
TRUCK TRAILER WEIGHTS
3300 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1795 ÷ 1895
1810 ÷ 1910
1860 ÷ 1960
Payload (*) including the driver:
1405 ÷ 1435
1390 ÷ 1435
1340 ÷ 1440
– front axle:
1750
1750
1750
– rear axle:
1900
1900
1900
3230-3300
3245-3300
3245-3300
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– total:
Towable loads:
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
277
TRUCK TRAILER WEIGHTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
3500 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1795 ÷ 1895
1810 ÷ 1910
1860 ÷ 1960
Payload (*) including the driver:
1535 ÷ 1590
1535 ÷ 1590
1540 ÷ 1640
– front axle:
1850
1850
1850
– rear axle:
2000
2000
2000
3330-3500
3345-3500
3345-3500
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
STARTING AND
DRIVING
– total:
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
278
Towable loads:
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
TRAILER TRUCK WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
3500 kg GVW versions
110 (°)/130
4000 kg GVW versions
180 MultiJet
Power
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
MultiJet
180 MultiJet
Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without optional
equipment)
1895 ÷ 1985
1945 ÷ 2035
1895 ÷ 1985
1945 ÷ 2035
Payload (*) including the driver:
1515 ÷ 1605
1465 ÷ 1555
2015 ÷ 2105
1965 ÷ 2055
– front axle:
2100
2100
2100
2100
– rear axle:
2400
2400
2400
2400
– total:
3500
3500
4000
4000
– trailer with brakes:
2500
2500
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
120
120
120
120
Maximum permitted loads (**)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Towable loads:
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
279
WEIGHTS OF CHASSIS CAB FRAME WITH PLATFORM
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
3000 kg GVW versions
110
115 MultiJet (°)
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
3300 kg GVW versions
(°)/130/150
110
115 MultiJet (°)
MultiJet
Unladen weight (*) (with all fluids, fuel
tank 90% full and without optional
equipment)
(°)/130/150
MultiJet
1600
1580 ÷ 1615
1580 ÷ 1615
1595 ÷ 1630
– front axle:
1630
1630
1750
1750
– rear axle:
1650
1650
1900
1900
– total:
3000
3000
3300
3300
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2000
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
100
100
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
280
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
WEIGHTS OF CHASSIS CAB FRAME WITH PLATFORM
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130 MultiJet
1580 ÷ 1615
1595 ÷ 1630
– front axle:
1850
1850
– rear axle:
2000
2000
– total:
3500
3500
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
3500 kg GVW versions
Unladen weight (*) (with all fluids, fuel tank
90% full and without optional equipment)
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
281
WEIGHTS OF CHASSIS CAB FRAME WITH PLATFORM (MAXI versions)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
3500 kg GVW versions
110 (°)/130
4000 kg GVW versions
180 MultiJet
Power
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
MultiJet
180 MultiJet
Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without optional
equipment)
1655 ÷ 1685
1705 ÷ 1735
1655 ÷ 1685
1705 ÷ 1735
Payload (*) including the driver:
1815 ÷ 1845
1765 ÷ 1795
2315 ÷ 2345
2265 ÷ 2295
– front axle:
2100
2100
2100
2100
– rear axle:
2400
2400
2400
2400
– total:
3500
3500
4000
4000
– trailer with brakes:
3000
3000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
120
120
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
282
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS
115 MultiJet (#) (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(#)
180 MultiJet
Power(#)
1590 ÷ 1630
1605 ÷ 1635
1655 ÷ 1695
– front axle:
1630
1630
1630
– rear axle:
1650
1650
1650
– total:
3000
3000
3000
3000 kg GVW versions
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Unladen weight (*) (with all fluids, fuel tank
90% full and without optional
equipment)
SAFETY
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
- braked trailer:
3000
3000
3000
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
(#)Chassis version
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
283
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
284
3300 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (#) (°)
115 MultiJet (°) (°)
1590 ÷ 1640
1545 ÷ 1560
– front axle:
1750
1750
– rear axle:
1900
1900
– total:
3300
3300
- braked trailer:
3000
2000
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment) (*)
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
(#)Chassis version
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS
3300 kg GVW versions
3300 kg GVW versions
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(#)
150 MultiJet(#)
150 MultiJet(°)
180 MultiJet
Power(°)
1605 ÷ 1655
1605 ÷ 1655
1560 ÷ 1580
1655 ÷ 1705
– front axle:
1750
1750
1750
1750
– rear axle:
1900
1900
1900
1900
– total:
3300
3300
3300
3300
– trailer with brakes:
3000
3000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
100
100
100
100
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without optional
equipment) (*)
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
(°)Special version
(#)Chassis version
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
285
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
286
3500 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (#) (°)
115 MultiJet (°) (°)
1590 ÷ 1640
1545 ÷ 1575
– front axle:
1850
1850
– rear axle:
2000
2000
– total:
3500
3500
- braked trailer:
3000
2000
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment) (*)
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
(#)Chassis version
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS
3500 kg GVW versions
3500 kg GVW versions
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(#)
150 MultiJet(#)
150 MultiJet(°)
180 MultiJet
Power(°)
1605 ÷ 1655
1605 ÷ 1655
1560 ÷ 1590
1655 ÷ 1705
– front axle:
1850
1850
1850
1850
– rear axle:
2000
2000
2000
2000
– total:
3500
3500
3500
3500
– trailer with brakes:
3000
3000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
100
100
100
100
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without optional
equipment) (*)
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
(°)Special version
(#)Chassis version
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
287
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
3500 kg GVW versions
3500 kg GVW versions
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(#)
180 MultiJet
Power(#)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(°)
180 MultiJet
Power(°)
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without optional
equipment)
1675 ÷ 1710
1725 ÷ 1760
1610 ÷ 1630
1660 ÷ 1680
Payload (*) including the driver
1790 ÷ 1825
1740 ÷ 1775
1870 ÷ 1890
1820 ÷ 1840
– front axle:
2100
2100
2100
2100
– rear axle:
2400
2400
2400
2400
– total:
3500
3500
3500
3500
– trailer with brakes:
3000
3000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
120
120
120
120
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
288
(°)Special version
(#)Chassis version
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
4000 kg GVW versions
4000 kg GVW versions
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(#)
180 MultiJet
Power(#)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(°)
180 MultiJet
Power(°)
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without optional
equipment)
1675 ÷ 1710
1725 ÷ 1760
1610 ÷ 1630
1660 ÷ 1680
Payload (*) including the driver
2290 ÷ 2325
2240 ÷ 2275
2370 ÷ 2390
2320 ÷ 2340
– front axle:
2100
2100
2100
2100
– rear axle:
2400
2400
2400
2400
– total:
4000
4000
4000
4000
– trailer with brakes:
3000
3000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
100
100
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Towable loads:
(°)Special version
(#)Chassis version
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
289
CHASSIS COWL WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
3500 kg GVW versions
3500 kg GVW versions
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(#)
180 MultiJet
Power(#)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(°)
180 MultiJet
Power(°)
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without optional
equipment)
1375÷1410
1425 ÷ 1460
1310÷1330
1360 ÷ 1380
Payload (*) including the driver
2090÷2125
2040 ÷ 2075
2170 ÷ 2190
2120 ÷ 2140
– front axle:
2100
2100
2100
2100
– rear axle:
2400
2400
2400
2400
– total:
3500
3500
3500
3500
– trailer with brakes:
3000
3000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
120
120
120
120
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
290
(°)Special version
(#)Chassis version
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
CHASSIS COWL WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
4000 kg GVW versions
4000 kg GVW versions
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(#)
180 MultiJet
Power(#)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet(°)
180 MultiJet
Power(°)
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without optional
equipment)
1375 ÷ 1410
1425 ÷ 1460
1310 ÷ 1330
1360 ÷ 1380
Payload (*) including the driver
2590 ÷ 2625
2540 ÷ 2575
2670 ÷ 2690
2620 ÷ 2640
– front axle:
2100
2100
2100
2100
– rear axle:
2400
2400
2400
2400
– total:
4000
4000
4000
4000
– trailer with brakes:
3000
3000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
100
100
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Towable loads:
(°)Special version
(#)Chassis version
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
291
CREW CAB TRUCK WEIGHTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
3300 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1950 ÷ 2010
1965 ÷ 2025
2015 ÷ 2075
Payload (*) including the driver:
1290 ÷ 1350
1275 ÷ 1335
1225 ÷ 1285
– front axle:
1750
1750
1750
– rear axle:
1900
1900
1900
– total:
3300
3300
3300
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
292
Towable loads:
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
CREW CAB TRUCK WEIGHTS
3500 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1950 ÷ 2010
1965 ÷ 2025
2015 ÷ 2075
Payload (*) including the driver:
1490 ÷ 1550
1475 ÷ 1535
1425 ÷ 1485
– front axle:
1850
1850
1850
– rear axle:
2000
2000
2000
– total:
3500
3500
3500
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
– trailer with brakes:
2500
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
120
120
120
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
293
CREW CAB TRUCK WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
294
110 (°)/130 MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment)
2005 ÷ 2105
2055 ÷ 2155
Payload (*) including the driver:
1395 ÷ 1495
1345 ÷ 1445
– front axle:
2100
2100
– rear axle:
2400
2400
– total:
3500
3500
– trailer with brakes:
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
120
120
3500/4000 kg GVW versions
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
COMBI WEIGHTS
3000 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
1935
1950
2000
Payload (*) including the driver:
1065
1050
1000
– front axle:
1600
1600
1600
– rear axle:
1650
1650
1650
– total:
3000
3000
3000
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
295
COMBI WEIGHTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
3300 kg GVW versions
3500 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet
Power
110 (°)/130
(°)
MultiJet
180 MultiJet
Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel
tank filled to 90% and without
optional equipment)
1935 ÷ 2045
1950 ÷ 2060
2000 ÷ 2100
2125
2175
Payload (*) including the driver:
1255 ÷ 1365
1240 ÷ 1350
1190 ÷ 1300
1375
1325
– front axle:
1750
1750
1750
1850
1850
– rear axle:
1900
1900
1900
2000
2000
– total:
3300
3300
3300
3500
3500
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2500
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with
brakes):
100
100
100
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
296
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
COMBI WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
110 (°)/130 MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment)
2100
2150
Payload (*) including the driver:
1400
1350
– front axle:
2100
2100
– rear axle:
2400
2400
– total:
3500
3500
– trailer with brakes:
3000
3000
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
120
120
3500 kg GVW versions
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
297
PANORAMA WEIGHTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
3000 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
2200
2215
2265
Payload (*) including the driver:
800
785
735
– front axle:
1630
1630
1630
– rear axle:
1650
1650
1650
– total:
3000
3000
3000
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
298
Towable loads:
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
PANORAMA WEIGHTS
3300 kg GVW versions
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without optional equipment)
2200÷ 2285
2215 ÷ 2300
2265 ÷ 2350
Payload (*) including the driver:
1015 ÷ 1100
1000 ÷ 1085
950 ÷ 1035
– front axle:
1750
1750
1750
– rear axle:
1900
1900
1900
– total:
3300
3300
3300
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Maximum permitted loads (**)
Towable loads:
– trailer with brakes:
2000
2500
2500
– trailer without brakes:
750
750
750
Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):
100
100
100
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to
the maximum permitted loads.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within
the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
299
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
300
REFUELLING
115
MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
150
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Fuel tank including a
reserve of (litres):
90 (*)
90 (*)
90 (*)
90 (*)
including a reserve of
(litres):
10/12
10/12
10/12
10/12
Engine cooling system
(litres):
8 (**)
9,6 (**)
9,6 (**)
10 (**)
Engine sump (litres):
4,9
5,3
5,3
8
Engine sump and filter
(litres):
5,7
5,9
5,9
9
-
2.7 (MLGU
gearbox)
2,7
-
Gearbox casing/differential
(litres):
Prescribed fuels and
original lubricants
Diesel for motor vehicles
(EN590 specification)
50-50 mixture of water and
PARAFLU UP (***)
SELENIA WR P.E.
TUTELA CAR EXPERYA
(°)Version for specific markets
(*) A 120 litre tank is available on request for all versions (with reserve of 12 litres). With the "Recreational" option a 60 litre tank is
available on request (with reserve of 10 litres).
(**) With Webasto: + 1/4 litre - Underseat heater 600 cc: + 1 litre - Rear heater 900 cc: + 1.5 litres
(***) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.
115
MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
150
MultiJet
180 MultiJet Power
Prescribed fuels and
original lubricants
2.9
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
GEARTECH
Gearbox/differential casing
(litres):
2.9
2.9 (M38
gearbox)
Hydraulic braking circuit
with ABS (kg):
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
Hydraulic braking circuit
with ASR/ESP (kg):
0,62
0,62
0,62
0,62
Hydraulic power steering:
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
TUTELA CAR GI/E
Windscreen/headlight
washer reservoir:
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
Mixture of water and
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC35
(°)Version for specific markets
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
TUTELA TOP 4
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
301
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet
the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees
the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and
duration.
SAFETY
RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Fluid and lubricant features for a correct
use of the car
Use
Diesel engine
lubricants
SAE 5W-30 grade synthetic based lubricants
Classification FIAT 9.55535-S1 ACEA C2.
Genuine fluids and
lubricants
SELENIA WR P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference No.
F510.D07
Replacement
interval
According to
Scheduled Servicing
Plan
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES In case of emergency, if the above specified lubricants are not available, products with the minimum indicated
ACEA performance can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not
guaranteed.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
302
The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause
damage to the engine that are not covered by the warranty.
Use
Lubricants and
greases for drive
transmission
Brake fluid
Fluid and lubricant features for a correct
use of the car
Genuine fluids and
lubricants
Applications
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAE 75W- 80 grade synthetic lubricant.
Classification FIAT 9.55550-MZ2.
TUTELA
TRANSMISSION
EXPERYA
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F178.B06
Manual gearbox and
differential
SAE 75W-85 grade synthetic lubricant
Classification FIAT 9.55550-MZ3
TUTELA
TRANSMISSION
GEARTECH
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F704.C08
Manual gearbox and
differential
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Molybdenum disulphide grease, for use at high
temperatures.
Classification FIAT 9.55580. Consistency
NLGI 1-2
TUTELA ALL STAR
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F702.G07
Wheel side constant
velocity joints
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Grease for constant velocity joints with low
friction coefficient.
Classification FIAT 9.55580. Consistency
NLGI 0-1
TUTELA STAR 700
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F701.C07
Differential side
constant velocity
joints
Lubricant for power steering
Exceeds "ATF DEXRON III" specifications
Classification FIAT 9.55550-AG2.
TUTELA
TRANSMISSION
GI/E
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F001.C94
Hydraulic power
steering
Synthetic fluid for brake and clutch systems
Exceeds specifications: FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4,
ISO 4925, SAE J 1704
Classification FIAT 9.55597.
TUTELA TOP 4
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F001.A93
Hydraulic brakes and
clutch controls
SAFETY
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
303
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
304
Genuine fluids and
lubricants
Applications
Protective agent
for radiators
Red protective agent with antifreeze action,
based on inhibited monoethylene glycol with
organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16,
ASTM D 3306 specifications.
FIAT Classification 9.55523.
PARAFLUUP (*)
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F101.M01
Cooling circuits Use
rate 50% up to -35°C.
Mixture with different
formulation products
not allowed.
Diesel fuel
additive
Additive for diesel antifreeze, protecting diesel
engines.
TUTELA DIESEL
ART
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F601.L06
To be mixed with
diesel (25 cc per 10
litres)
Windscreen
washer fluid
Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC
956-II.
FIAT Classification 9.55522.
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC
35
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F201.D02
To be used diluted or
undiluted in
windscreen/rear
window washer/wiper
systems
Use
Fluid and lubricant features for a correct
use of the car
(*)When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of
PARAFLU UP and distilled water.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption figures given in the tables below are determined on the basis of the type-approval tests
laid down by specific European Directives. The procedures below are followed for measuring consumption:
❒ urban cycle: begins with cold starting, followed by driving simulating the use of the vehicle in town;
❒ extra-urban cycle: driving that simulates using the vehicle out of town with frequent acceleration in all
gears; the speed varies from 0 to 120 km/h;
❒ combined fuel consumption: calculated with a weighting of approximately 37% of the urban cycle and 63%
of the extra-urban cycle.
IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic situations, weather conditions, driving style, general conditions of the
vehicle, trim level/equipment/accessories, climate control system, vehicle load, roof rack, other situations
that affect air drag may lead to different fuel consumption levels than those measured.
Gross vehicle
weight
PANORAMA
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Consumption
Urban
Extra-urban
Combi
115 MultiJet (°)
3,000 – 3,300 kg
8,6
6,0
7,0
110 (°)/130 MultiJet
3,000 – 3,300 kg
8,7
6,1
7,1
150 MultiJet
3,000 – 3,300 kg
8,7
6,1
7,1
180 MultiJet Power
3,000 – 3,300 kg
10,7
6,4
8,0
(°)Version for specific markets
SAFETY
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
Fuel consumption (according to the current European Directive - litres/100 km)
Versions
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
305
Fuel consumption (according to the current European Directive - litres/100 km)
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
Versions
Gross vehicle
weight
COMBI
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
115 MultiJet (°)
110 (°)/130 MultiJet
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
150 MultiJet
IN AN EMERGENCY
180 MultiJet Power
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
306
(°)Version for specific markets
Consumption
Urban
Extra-urban
Combi
3,000 kg
8,0
5,4
6,4
3,300 kg
8,3
5,7
6,7
3,500 kg
8,3
5,7
6,7
3,000 kg
8,3
5,6
6,6
3,300 kg
8,5
5,9
6,9
3,500 kg
8,5
5,9
6,9
3,000 kg
8,3
5,6
6,6
3,300 kg
8,5
5,9
6,9
3,500 kg
8,5
5,9
6,9
3,000 kg
9,5
5,5
7,0
3,300 kg
10,3
6,0
7,6
3,500 kg
10,7
6,4
8,0
Fuel consumption (according to the current European Directive - litres/100 km)
Consumption
115
MultiJet(°)
Versions
Gross vehicle weight
Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1 MLH1/
Cab chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed
Urban
Extra-urb.
Combi
2800, 3000, 3300, 3500
8,0
6,1
6,8
Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double
cab, MH1
3000, 3300, 3500
8,2
6,3
7,0
Van LH1/Double cab LH1
3300, 3500
8,5
6,5
7,2
Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1/Cab
chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab
3000, 3300, 3500
8,3
6,4
7,1
MultiJet
Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1
LH1/double cab, MH1
3000, 3300, 3500, 3500
Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi
8,5
6,4
7,2
Van LH1/Double cab LH1, MH1
3300, 3500, 3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
8,8
6,6
7,4
SAFETY
cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
(*)/Chassis cowl (*)
110 (°)/130
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
(°)Version for specific markets
(*)Such consumption should be understood as referring to vehicles before conversion
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
307
Consumption
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
180 MultiJet
Power
Versions
Gross vehicle weight
Box truck CH1/Cab chassis and double
cab (*)/Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1
LH1
Urban
Extra-urb.
Combi
3000, 3300, 3500
9,7
6,5
7,7
3000, 3300, 3500
10,1
6,7
8,0
3500 Heavy, 4005, 4250
Maxi
10,3
6,8
8,1
Cab chassis (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
3300, 3500, 3650, 3500
Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi
10,6
7,0
8,3
Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double
cab, MH1 LH1
3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250
Maxi
10,9
7,0
8,4
Van LH1/Box truck LH1/Double cab
MH1 LH1
3300, 3500
11,1
7,1
8,5
Van CH1/Box truck MH1 MLH1/Cab
chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab
(*)/Chassis cowl (*)
(*)Such consumption should be understood as referring to vehicles before conversion
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
308
CO2 EMISSIONS
The CO2 emission levels given in the following tables refer to combined consumption.
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
CO2 emissions (according to the current European Directive litres/100 km)
Gross vehicle
weight
Emissions
115 MultiJet (°)
3,000 – 3,300 kg
182
110 (°)130 MultiJet
3,000 – 3,300 kg
186
150 MultiJet
3,000 – 3,300 kg
186
180 MultiJet Power
3,000 – 3,300 kg
210
Versions
SAFETY
PANORAMA
(°)Version for specific markets
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
309
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
CO2 emissions (according to the current European Directive g/km)
Versions
Gross vehicle
weight
Emissions
3,000 kg
166
3,300 kg
174
3,500 kg
182
3,000 kg
173
3,300 kg
180
3,500 kg
180
3,000 kg
173
3,300 kg
180
3,500 kg
180
3,000 kg
184
3,300 kg
200
3,500 kg
210
COMBI
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
115 MultiJet
110 (°)/130 MultiJet
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
150 MultiJet
IN AN EMERGENCY
180 MultiJet Power
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
310
(°)Version for specific markets
CO2 emissions (according to the current European Directive g/km)
115 MultiJet
110 (°)/130
MultiJet
180 MultiJet
Power
CO2 emissions
Versions
Gross vehicle weight
Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1 MLH1/Cab chassis
and double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
2800, 3000, 3300, 3500
179
Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab, MH1
3000, 3300, 3500
185
Van LH1/Double cab LH1
3300, 3500
190
Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1/Cab chassis and
double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
3000, 3300, 3500
186
Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1/double
cab, MH1
3000, 3300, 3500, 3500
Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi
189
Van LH1/Double cab LH1, MH1
3300, 3500, 3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
195
Box truck CH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/
Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
3000, 3300, 3500
203
Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1
3000, 3300, 3500
209
Van CH1/Box truck MH1 MLH1/Cab chassis and
double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250
Maxi
213
Cab chassis (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
3300, 3500, 3650, 3500
Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi
219
Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab, MH1 LH1
3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250
Maxi
222
Van LH1/Box truck LH1/Double cab MH1 LH1
3300, 3500
224
(*)Such consumption should be understood as referring to vehicles before conversion
(°)Version for specific markets
Combi
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
311
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
312
PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE
Fiat has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement
of its production processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly "eco-compatible". To assure
customers of the best possible service in terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European
Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of their life, Fiat is offering their customers the
opportunity of handing over their vehicle(*) at the end of its life without incurring any additional costs.
The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not
incur any expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value. In particular, in almost all European
Union countries, until 1st January 2007, vehicles registered after 1st July 2002 will be collected free of
charge, whilst from 2007 collection will be free of charge irrespective of the year of registration as long as the
vehicle contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and bodywork) and has no additional waste.
To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, go to one of our Dealerships or
Fiat-authorised collection and scrapping centres. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high
quality service for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the
surrounding environment.
You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from a Fiat and Fiat
Commercial Vehicle Dealership or by calling the toll-free number 00800 3428 0000 or on the Fiat website.
(*) Vehicle for transporting passengers with a maximum of nine seats and a total permitted weight of 3.5 t
OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
313
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
314
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
315
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
316
®
®
NOTES
INDEX
ABS failure warning light......... 173
ABS................................................ 109
ABS (system failure warning
light)............................................ 173
Additional heater ........................ 59
Additional rear climate
control (Panorama/Combi) .... 66
Additional rear heating
(Panorama/Combi) ................... 65
Advice for extending
battery life ................................. 240
Air bag failure warning light..... 169
Air bag (failure warning
light)............................................ 169
Air bags (general warnings) ..... 149
Air cleaner................................... 238
Air suspension............................. 96
Arrangement possibilities
for Universal Isofix child
seat on seats of vehicle .......... 143
Ashtray.......................................... 89
ASR system ................................. 113
Automatic climate control ....... 53
Automatic headlight sensor ..... 70
Battery (charge)........................ 219
Battery (disconnector) ..............
Battery disconnector .................
Battery
– Replacement..........................
Battery (low charge warning
light)............................................
Battery replacement .................
body paintwork
identification plate ...................
Bodywork
– Advice for preserving the
bodywork...............................
– Exterior and underbody
warranty .................................
– Protection from
atmospheric agents..............
Bodywork version .....................
Bonnet..........................................
Book rest......................................
Brake fluid/handbrake
warning light..............................
Brake fluid....................................
Brake fluid (warning light .........
Brake pads (wear warning
light)............................................
Brake pad wear warning
light .............................................
81 Brakes (brake pad wear
81 warning light) ............................
Brakes
– specifications .........................
239
Bulbs
170 – types of bulbs........................
239 Bump starting .............................
Cab glove compartment ..........
253 Camera and display for rear
visibility .......................................
Capucine .......................................
247 Central locking............................
Changing a bulb..........................
247 Chassis marking..........................
Checking and restoring
246 pressure .....................................
254 Checking fluid levels..................
105 Children (safe transport)
90 – Arrangement possibilities
for child seats........................
168 – Child seats .............................
235 – Safety regulations .................
168 Cigar lighter .................................
Clutch...........................................
177 CO2 emissions...........................
Compartment beneath
177 passenger side front seat ........
177
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
259
197
182
91
92
91
82
195
253
194
228
139
135
140
88
258
309
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
87
321
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
322
159 DPF (Particulate filter) ............. 128
78 Driving style ................................ 158
74
EBD (system)............................. 110
195
Electrical power supply and
Daytime running lights....... 67-201 fuel cut-off switch..................... 83
Dead lock .................................... 100 Electric windows........................ 104
Demanding vehicle use............. 227 Electronic alarm .......................... 10
Desk/Book rest ........................... 90 Engine codes ............................... 254
Diesel filter (water warning
Engine coolant ............................ 233
light)............................................ 174
Engine coolant temperature
Diffusers........................................ 45 gauge............................................ 15
Dimensions ................................. 265 Engine coolant (warning
Dipped beam headlights..... 68-201 light)............................................ 170
– Warning light......................... 178 Engine coolant warning light ... 170
Direction indicators ............ 69-202 Engine ........................................... 256
Engine marking ........................... 253
– Left direction indicator
warning light .......................... 178 Engine oil (insufficient
– Right direction indicator
pressure warning light) ........... 170
warning light .......................... 178 Engine oil ..................................... 232
Door pockets .............................. 87 Engine oil level gauge ................. 16
Doors ............................................ 97 EOBD system ............................. 116
DPF (particulate filter)
ESP (system) ............................... 111
cleaning in progress
warning light.............................. 176 ESP/Traction Plus system
failure warning light ................. 177
DPF (particulate filter)
ESP/Traction Plus (system
(cleaning in progress
warning light) ............................ 176 failure warning light)................ 177
Conditions of use ......................
Controls........................................
Cruise control .............................
Cylinder replacement ...............
External light failure warning
light ............................................. 175
External lights (failure
warning light) ............................ 175
External lights.............................. 67
Fiat CODE system ....................
4
Fiat CODE (vehicle
protection system failure
warning light) ............................ 175
Fix&Go Automatic fast tyre
repair kit ........... 190-192-194-195
Flap on bench.......................... 34-91
Flashing.......................................... 69
Fluids and lubricants.................. 302
Fog lights................................ 79-203
– Warning light......................... 178
Fog lights warning light............. 178
Follow me home device ............ 70
Follow me home ......................... 70
Front air bags.............................. 144
– Front driver side air bag ..... 145
– Front passenger side air
bag ........................................... 145
– Manually deactivating the
front air bag and side bag ... 146
Front roof light (replacing a
bulb)............................................ 208
Fuel consumption ......................
Fuel level gauge ...........................
Fuel reserve warning light........
Fuel (reserve warning light).....
Fuel supply...................................
Fuel tank cap...............................
Fuses (replacement) ..................
305 Headlights
15 – Headlight alignment
corrector................................ 108
173
173 – Light beam direction ........... 108
257 Headlight washers ............... 73-245
127 Head restraints
210 – Front ........................................ 38
Heated rear window.................. 80
Gearbox ...................................... 155 Heating and ventilation
Gear lever.................................... 155 controls....................................... 46
General failure warning light ... 175 Heating and ventilation ............. 44
Hill Holder (system) ................. 112
General failure (warning
light)............................................ 175 Identification data ..................... 252
Glove compartment.............. 85-86 Ignition device ............................. 11
Glove compartment with
In an emergency......................... 181
lock .............................................. 85
Incomplete door/load
Glow plug heating failure
compartment closure ............. 172
warning light.............................. 174 Independent supplementary
Glow plug heating warning
heater .......................................... 60
light ............................................. 174 Inflation pressure ....................... 264
Glow plugs (heating/heating
Inflation procedure.................... 192
failure warning light)................ 174
Injection system
Handbrake (warning light........ 168 failure/EOBD engine
management system failure
Hazard warning lights ................ 78 warning light.............................. 172
Headlight alignment
Injection system (failure
corrector ................................... 108 warning light) ............................ 172
Instrument panel ...................... 3-13
Insufficient engine oil
pressure warning light.............
Interior fittings ............................
Interiors .......................................
Isofix child seats (setup)
– Arrangement possibilities
for child seat on seats of
vehicle .....................................
170
85
250
SAFETY
143
Jump starting .............................. 181
Left direction indicator
warning light .............................
Light beam direction .................
Lights off .......................................
Loading advice ............................
Low battery charge warning
light .............................................
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
178
108
67
156
170
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
Main beam headlights ........ 68-200
Maintenance and care regular checks...........................
Maintenance and care Scheduled Servicing.................
Maintenance and care scheduled servicing plan.........
Manual climate control..............
Manually deactivating the
front air bag and side bag.......
Moving footboard ......................
227
223
224
49
146
102
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
323
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
324
Right direction indicator
warning light.............................. 178
Rim Protector............................. 262
Rims and tyres............................ 260
Roof lights .................................... 76
Roof rack ..................................... 107
Rubber hoses .............................. 243
Saving fuel ................................... 157
SBR system.................................. 131
Seat base plastic covers............. 35
Seat belts
– Use .......................................... 129
Seat belts not fastened............. 172
Seats (Combi versions) ............. 36
Seats............................................... 30
Seats (Panorama version) ......... 36
Seats with adjustable
armrests...................................... 32
Seat with revolving base............ 32
Setup for Isofix child seat ........ 141
Shelf above cab............................ 90
Side bags ...................................... 146
Side lights ...................... 68-200-208
Ski rack......................................... 107
Sliding door ................................. 100
Revolving seat with seat
Prescriptions for vehicle at
end of life................................... 312 belts ............................................. 33 Sliding side window ................... 101
114 Pretensioners.............................. 131
Prolonged vehicle inactivity ..... 167
17 Protecting the environment .... 128
19
Radio............................................ 123
17
Rain sensor................................... 73
Number plate lights.................. 207 Raising the vehicle ..................... 220
On board instruments .............. 14 Rear door with two wings....... 102
Parking......................................... 153 Rear fog lights ....................... 80-205
Parking lights ........................... 69-80 – Warning light......................... 175
Rear fog light warning light...... 175
Parking sensor failure
warning light.............................. 177 Rear partition .............................. 87
Parking sensors (failure
Rear roof light (replacing a
warning light) ............................ 177 bulb)............................................ 209
Parking sensors .......................... 117 Rear view camera ....................... 92
Particulate filter (DPF) ............. 128 Rear view mirrors....................... 40
Passenger side air bag/side
Refrigerated compartment....... 85
bags (warning light) ................. 173
Refuelling...................................... 300
Passenger side air bags/side
bags deactivated....................... 173 Refuelling the vehicle ................ 126
Performance................................ 271 Replacing a wheel....................... 183
Pollen filter .................................. 238 Replacing exterior bulbs........... 199
Portable navigator socket ......... 91 Replacing interior bulbs............ 208
Power socket ............................... 89 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 244
Power steering fluid .................. 236 Rev counter.................................. 14
MSR system.................................
Multifunction display
– Control buttons ....................
– Setup menu.............................
– Standard screen.....................
Snow chains................................. 166
Snow tyres................................... 165
Spare wheel................................. 260
Speed block.................................. 95
Speedometer ............................... 14
Spray nozzles .............................. 245
Sprung seat................................... 31
Starting the engine.... 151-181-182
Start&Stop system..................... 119
Steering ........................................ 259
Steering wheel............................. 39
Stopping the engine................... 153
Sun visors ..................................... 89
Suspension................................... 258
Symbols ......................................... 4
Tachograph .................................
third brake lights ........................
Towing the vehicle.....................
Towing trailers............................
Traction Plus system .................
Transmission ...............................
Tray under seat ...........................
Trip computer .............................
Tyres .............................................
Upper storage
compartment............................. 85
Vehicle protection system
failure warning light (Fiat
CODE)....................................... 175
VIN plate...................................... 252
KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Warming up the engine just
after it has started .................. 152
Warning lights and messages .. 168
Washer fluid for
windscreen/rear window ....... 234
Water in diesel filter sensor.... 174
Weights ........................................ 272
Wheel geometry........................ 260
Wheels and tyres....................... 241
Wheels ......................................... 260
94 Window cleaning ........................ 71
206 Windscreen wiper ............ 72-244
221
160
115
258
35
27
260
STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
325
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Parts & Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Turin (Italy)
Print no. 603.99 .321 - 05 /2013 - 1st Edition
DUCATO LUM GB
17-12-2008
9:57
Pagina 1
F
I
A
T
D
U
C
A
T
ENGLISH
The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and
versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.
If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.
Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.
O
W
N
E
R
H
A
N
D
B
O
O
K
O